You are on page 1of 358

Broadcasting Division

System Manual

R&S NR82xx FM Transmitter


VHF, solid-state, high-power

All activities connected with installing, starting up, operating, maintaining,


troubleshooting and servicing the described system must be carried out by specialist
technicians only.

Printed in Germany

3562.0908.72 -6 - 0.1 -
System Manual
Transmitter Series R&S NR8200
Edition: April 2008
Version: EN-6

2008 Rohde&Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG


81671 Munich, Germany

The reproduction of this document as well as the use and transmission of its contents for other than its
intended purpose are permitted only with the explicit permission of the copyright holder or other persons
with the right to grant permission.

Infringements will result in legal action for damages.


All rights reserved for patenting or utility model registration.

R&S is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Brand names are trademarks of the respective proprietors.

ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG


D-12557 Berlin - Wendenschlossstrae 168
Tel.: (030) 65891-122 ^ Int. +493065891-122
Fax: (030) 65891-221 ^ Int. +493065891-221
Internet: www.rohde-schwarz.com
Printed in Federal Republic of Germany ^ Subject to change without notice ^ Data without tolerances; typical
values only

3562.0908.72 -6 - 0.2 -
R&S NR82xx CONTENTS

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1

DESIGN AND FUNCTION 2

INSTALLATION 3

PUTTING INTO OPERATION 4

OPERATION 5

MAINTENANCE 6

TROUBLESHOOTING 7

SERVICING 8

APPENDIX 9

3562.0908.72 - 0.3 - EN-5


3562.0908.72 - 0.4 - EN-5
Broadcasting Division

CHAPTER 1

SAFETY

Printed in Germany

3562.0908.72 - 1.1 - EN-5


Chapter 1 Safety

CONTENTS

1 Information About This Manual ...................................................... 4

2 Safety Instructions for Transmitter Systems and Equipment ..... 5

3 General Safety Instructions ............................................................ 6

4 Special Hazard Information ............................................................ 7


4.1 Hazards from AC Supply Voltage .................................................................7
4.1.1 AC Power Supply .........................................................................................7
4.1.2 Changing Fuses ...........................................................................................8
4.1.3 Emergency OFF Equipment .........................................................................8
4.1.4 Opening Transmitter .....................................................................................8
4.2 Hazards from High-Energy Electric Circuits ................................................9
4.3 Hazards from RF Radiation .........................................................................10
4.3.1 Obligation to Instruct Personnel .................................................................10
4.3.2 RF Shielding ...............................................................................................10
4.3.3 Rules When Operating Transmitter ............................................................10
4.3.4 Rules When Working on Open Transmitter ................................................11
4.4 Fire Hazard ....................................................................................................11
4.5 Hazards from Beryllium Oxide (BeO) Ceramics ........................................12
4.5.1 Rules When Handling BeO Ceramics ........................................................12
4.5.2 Identification of Parts Containing BeO Ceramics .......................................12
4.5.3 Measures in Case of Breakage and When Disposing of Waste .................13

3562.0908.72 - 1.3 - EN-5


Chapter 1 Safety

1 Information About This Manual

This manual is part of the documentation for the NR8000 transmitter family from
Rohde & Schwarz. Each transmitter and each individual transmitter component is de-
scribed in its own dedicated manual. The individual manuals for the transmitter family are
modular in design and adapted to each other.

Structure

Each component of a transmitter is described in its own manual in enough detail that the
component can be used (insofar as it is good practice) as an individual unit. The transmitter
manual, which is the central and overarching part of the total documentation, describes all
the steps involved in installing, starting up, operating and maintaining a transmitter. At cer-
tain places in the transmitter manual, reference will be made to the appropriate component
manuals. Similarly the component manuals will make reference to the transmitter manual if
the component is to be used as a module of the transmitter.

Contents

The manuals in the transmitter family describe all the steps involved in installing, starting
up, operating, maintaining, troubleshooting and servicing the transmitter or a component.
The appendix contains the interface descriptions and the technical documentation.

All manuals are identically formatted for greater clarity. Sections which are not relevant to
a particular manual are included for the sake of form, but left blank.

Safety

All skilled personnel working with a transmitter or its components have a duty to read the
associated manuals and to follow the safety measures described in the Safety section and
at appropriate points in the manual. The transmitter and the individual components of the
transmitter must be used in accordance with the intended use and regulations. All activities
connected with the transmitter or individual transmitter components must be carried out by
skilled personnel. If activities require additional qualifications, this is indicated at the appro-
priate locations in the manual.

Symbols and notation

A "warning triangle" indicates potential hazards. The degree of danger is indicated by dif-
ferent key words next to the warning symbol.

Instructions are presented as numbered steps; the results after the instructions are indent-
ed.

Notes are preceded by the word "Note". They contain additional information and tips intend-
ed to make your work easier.

All other formatting options are intended to improve clarity and are self-explanatory.

3562.0908.72 - 1.4 - EN-5


Chapter 1 Safety

2 Safety Instructions for Transmitter Systems


and Equipment

ATTENTION!
The safety regulations specified in this manual must always be complied with.

The following points require special attention:

All electrical installation and connection work must be carried out by appropriately skilled
personnel only.
When equipping operating rooms and installing or using electrical equipment, the na-
tional and international safety regulations and recommendations must be observed.
These include, for example:
Protective measures for the prevention of accidents
Protection against overvoltages
Isolation of electrical systems
Grounding of electrical systems
Type and laying of electrical lines and cables
Regulations for special operating rooms and systems.

When installing the transmitter rack the country-specific rules for the prevention of acci-
dents must be observed, for instance with regard to the following:
Crushing hazard when working beneath suspended loads
Fall hazards when working on ladders
Risk of injury when lifting heavy loads.

Personal protective equipment (PPE) must be used when installations or repairs are be-
ing carried out. Depending on the type of work it may be necessary to wear protective
clothing such as hard hats, safety gloves, eye protection, etc.
Instruments and equipment must not be operated unless their cabinets are closed. Ob-
serve the appropriate safety requirements when opening cabinets for service or repair
work.
An external power supply limiter must be used for disconnecting instruments and sys-
tems from the AC supply. In addition disconnect all external sources of power, i.e. all
measuring cables, extension cables and multipoint connectors (except for special ser-
vice connectors). Then wait a further 5 minutes until all capacitors are properly dis-
charged.
Additional information on liquid-cooled transmitters: When installing the cooling system
and filling it with coolant (pump and heat exchanger) the applicable regulations on work-
ing with hazardous products (coolant) must be observed; see section Material safety
data sheets under EC safety data sheet Antifrogen.

3562.0908.72 - 1.5 - EN-5


Chapter 1 Safety

3 General Safety Instructions

This section contains general safety instructions applying to all products manufactured or
sold by Rohde & Schwarz.

In accordance with IEC215 or EN60215, transmitter systems and their add-on equipment
must be operated under the responsibility of qualified technicians only.

All legal provisions must be observed as a prerequisite for operating radio equipment and
systems. The operator or its representative is responsible for compliance with these guide-
lines. In addition they must ensure that the training of the operating staff satisfies the coun-
try-specific requirements. These also include regular training sessions.

3562.0908.72 - 1.6 - EN-5


Chapter 1 Safety

4 Special Hazard Information

4.1 Hazards from AC Supply Voltage

All Vrms > 30 V AC or V > 60 V DC voltages must be regarded as hazardous. When working
on voltages constituting a shock hazard, appropriate steps must be taken to exclude all
forms of risk. Working on live components is strictly forbidden. Work on live components is
only permitted in exceptional circumstances and in full compliance with special safety pre-
cautions.

4.1.1 AC Power Supply


Ensure that the AC supply specifications for the system or instruments match the spec-
ifications of the local AC supply before connecting the equipment. The supply circuit
must always be protected by a fuse in order to give protection against overload and short
circuit.

It is quite possible for a transmitter to have several separate electrical circuits. Each of these
circuits is subject to the following requirements:

All electrical connections between the transmitter and the AC supply must comply with
the following conditions:
The transmitter can be disconnected at any time.
The transmitter can be prevented from being switched back on.
The transmitter is terminated with a fully protected power cable matched to the power
consumption.1
Ensure that phase rotation is correct (direction of rotation of fans!).

Service connectors

It is common practice to equip transmitters with a connector that carries voltage even when
the transmitter is turned off and that allows power to be supplied to test equipment or a sol-
dering iron. These connectors are identified, e.g. by an LED, and may only be used for the
aforementioned purposes.

The current rating of this connector is limited in line with the intended purpose. The con-
nector is not suitable for supplying power to heating equipment or large test sets.

The operator of the transmitter is responsible for adequate fuse protection (the connec-
tor is labeled with the maximum current).
The transmitter operator is responsible for implementing appropriate safety procedures
for any accessories that are not switched off when the power to the overall transmitter
is interrupted.

1 Obtain the specifications from this documentation and also adhere to the breaking capacity limits of the fuses
and automatic cutouts in the transmitter.

3562.0908.72 - 1.7 - EN-5


Chapter 1 Safety

4.1.2 Changing Fuses


Fuses in parts of instruments that can be accessed by users must only be changed when
disconnected from the power supply. If alternative fuses are used they must have equiv-
alent electrical data, equivalent switching characteristics and equivalent interrupting ca-
pacity.
Motor protection switches and automatic line fuses in those parts of a transmitter system
that can be accessed by users must be tripped. If their response range is adjustable, the
ex-factory setting must not be altered. If settings are changed inadvertently, the correct
values shown in this documentation must be set.

4.1.3 Emergency OFF Equipment


At the request of the customer, transmitters are available with optional emergency but-
tons. These emergency buttons are disabled when the transmitter is delivered. It is the
responsibility of the operator to ensure that the operation of the emergency button com-
plies with safety requirements and that it is included in the emergency shutdown system
of the facility. Any emergency buttons that are not used as previously planned for emer-
gency shutdown purposes must be removed completely.
Attention! A transmitter normally has several independent power circuits, e.g. primary
circuit, power feed for accessories (central control unit, antenna changeover switch,
etc.) or a power feed for disabled connectors.
The operator is responsible for ensuring that all these circuits are properly integrated
into the emergency-off system onsite. Any circuit that is not included in this scheme must
be labeled accordingly.
Setting up a transmitter in which the emergency-off devices are disabled is not permit-
ted.

4.1.4 Opening Transmitter


When opening the transmitter in order to carry out mechanical/electrical work (e.g.
cleaning, repairs, etc.) it is essential to obey the five basic rules for the working on elec-
trical equipment:

Disconnect the transmitter from the power supply


Secure it against inadvertent switch-on
Check voltage to ensure that the equipment is de-energized
Ground or short-circuit the equipment1
Place a cover on all adjacent live circuits.

Attention! A transmitter normally has several independent power circuits, e.g. primary
circuit, power feed for accessories (central control unit, antenna changeover switch,
etc.) or a power feed for disabled connectors.
Ensure that electrical circuits are safe before doing any work. Disconnect any adjacent
live circuits to prevent accidental contact.

1 Grounding or shorting switches are not provided in all transmitter types. When a suitable grounding or shorting
device is not available, qualified staff must implement appropriate measures at their own discretion.

3562.0908.72 - 1.8 - EN-5


Chapter 1 Safety

The antenna supply terminal must also be isolated when work has to be performed on
RF circuits.
Caution! It is possible for energy from active transmitters that are connected to the same
antenna via an RF diplexer, for example, to be fed back via the antenna cable.
It is absolutely forbidden to open a transmitter that has not been isolated from the AC
supply without having taken proper steps to prevent accidental contact with live electri-
cal circuits.
Because of the risks associated with touching live components, it is forbidden to operate
the equipment with its doors open, or when front panels or plug-in modules have been
removed, etc.
When the transmitter is turned on for internal measurements or repairs, ensure that haz-
ard warning signs are properly posted at the workplace to warn of hazards in compliance
with basic electrical rules and regulations.
Take suitable precautions to prevent unauthorized access to the area.
When the work has been completed, the transmitter must be closed and the manufac-
turer's safety measures relating to the protection against accidental contact must be re-
stored. The functionality of protective devices (e.g. interlocks) must be checked
immediately.

4.2 Hazards from High-Energy Electric Circuits

The equipment includes low-voltage circuits that may be fed from a power supply having
extremely low impedance (e.g. amplifier operating voltages). These circuits carry danger-
ously high levels of energy. At R&S we treat these circuits as constituting a shock hazard.
For safety reasons, any high-energy circuits in the operator area of the transmitter are not
accessible and are protected by covers. The cover has a label.

Dangerous short circuits between live terminals may occur when covers have been re-
moved from an operating transmitter. A short circuit causes an arc that can result in burns,
snow blindness and other injuries caused by the person's reaction to the shock.

Note Instances occurring in practice continue to show that a short circuit triggered by a metal
hand tool causes severe burns. A short circuit causes an arc and the rated output of the
power supply sets up continuous welding.

Exercise the same amount of caution for measurements on low impedance supplies,
e.g. for repair purposes or to optimize the power consumption of the transmitter, as you
would when performing measurements on supply voltages constituting a shock hazard.
If necessary the appropriate protective equipment will have to be installed.
Before opening a transmitter or removing a cover, switch off the energizing voltage and
wait a further 5 minutes until all capacitors are properly discharged.
Do not discharge capacitors by short-circuiting them.

3562.0908.72 - 1.9 - EN-5


Chapter 1 Safety

4.3 Hazards from RF Radiation

4.3.1 Obligation to Instruct Personnel


The operator must train all personnel in the operation of this transmitter or equipment in
accordance with EN 60215 and/or IEC 215. It is essential that these regular instruction
sessions emphasize the dangers related to high frequency that exist on the respective
transmitter or equipment. Operators are only authorized to adjust and operate the equip-
ment after successful completion of the respective instruction sessions and after the re-
sults have been placed on record.

High-energy RF circuits inside the transmitter or equipment are routed via conventional re-
movable RF connectors (e.g. type N). Depending on the output power of the transmitter, the
output ports of the equipment are equipped with screw-type or plug-in RF lines or ducts.

Where an RF cable or module carries high power, the connection point or the entire module
is tagged with the general danger warning label (yellow triangle with a black exclamation
mark).

4.3.2 RF Shielding
Life threatening field strengths exist in the interior of cables and modules that conduct RF.
RF cables must therefore never be disconnected when the equipment is operational and
modules must never be operated when they have been opened.

Transmitters and instruments supplied by Rohde & Schwarz are shielded so that even in
the immediate vicinity there is no danger from RF radiation when all RF lines are connected.
The field strengths comply with the specifications contained in EU directive 1999/519/EC
and the 26th ordinance to the German Federal Government's Emission Control Act of De-
cember 16, 1996 (26. BImSchV), Emission limit values for electrical and magnetic field
strengths of high frequency installations.

These low levels of field strength can only be guaranteed if all RF cables have been con-
nected and modules have been closed.

4.3.3 Rules When Operating Transmitter


Disconnecting RF cables that are operational can result in arcs. These may cause burns
and snow blindness. 1

The transmitter system can only be operated when an operating or dummy antenna is
connected.
Do not disconnect any RF cables when the transmitter is operational.

1 Any attempt to operate the transmitter results in the emission of RF power. The disconnection of RF cables
will turn the RF produced by the transmitter off. Any such attempt to transmit RF can bring about the risk of
injury mentioned above, even if, as in the case of Rohde & Schwarz transmitters, technical measures are tak-
en to limit the seepage of RF to <60 s. It is also possible that the transmitter will be not turned off automatically
if a control unit (NETCCU 800) is faulty. The transmitter is not monitored while the control unit is booting up
and will not shut down automatically during this time.

3562.0908.72 - 1.10 - EN-5


Chapter 1 Safety

Never operate the transmitter when RF cables have been disconnected.


The antenna feedpoint must also be disconnected when the transmitter is being discon-
nected. Please note that the antenna cable can feed energy from operational transmit-
ters that are connected to the same antenna via an RF diplexer.
Do not open any modules while the transmitter is operational.

4.3.4 Rules When Working on Open Transmitter


Dangerous levels of RF will be radiated if a transmitter is turned on after it has been opened
and covers and shielding with general warning labels have been removed from RF mod-
ules.

It is the responsibility of the operator to ensure that proper safety procedures related to the
presence of personnel and work on a transmitter that has been opened be strictly followed.

The necessary safety regulations include:

Display RF radiation hazard signs at the workplace


Wear RF protective clothing
Take special precautions for persons with metal implants, pacemakers, etc, who are par-
ticularly at risk.

4.4 Fire Hazard

Every electrical circuit that is connected to a power supply of sufficient energy constitutes
a potential fire hazard, including radio transmitters. A fire safety concept for radio transmit-
ting equipment must therefore be established.

Operators must be trained in firefighting measures required for electrical installations and
this training must be repeated regularly. Training should satisfy the requirements of VDE
0132 and should be performed in consultation with the local fire department.

These statements apply to Germany. On-site preventive measures can reduce the danger
of fire to a large extent or prevent the spread of a fire as far as possible.

Prevention and firefighting

When the transmitter is being set up, the operator has to ensure that no flammable ma-
terials are stored in or attached to the area below or above the cable entry point.
Materials used to close openings to adjoining rooms must be flame-retardant.
Always wear the appropriate personal protective equipment (e.g. self-contained breath-
ing apparatus with air bottle), even when flames are small or not evident.
Use only suitable fire extinguishers (e.g. CO2 extinguishers) for firefighting.

On the one hand, the need for the use of firefighting protective equipment results from the
fact that every fire produces extremely toxic and unnoticeable carbon monoxide. On the
other hand, the materials contained in the equipment and systems will produce toxic va-
pors, gases and dusts, such as sulfuric acid and hydrogen sulfide, hydrochloric acid, diox-
ins, hydrofluoric acid and beryllium oxide dust, when exposed to external flame and heat.

3562.0908.72 - 1.11 - EN-5


Chapter 1 Safety

This relates to the following materials:

Rubber used in cables, grommets, vibration dampers and equipment feet


PVC in cables and interconnections
PUR (foam) in isolators, molded parts, sealing mats and isolating strips
Teflon in cables, interconnections, insulation and printed boards
Beryllium oxide ceramics in power transistors

4.5 Hazards from Beryllium Oxide (BeO) Ceramics

Note Equipment and modules with parts containing BeO ceramics must be labeled accordingly.
The following explanations apply:

Parts containing BeO ceramics do not present adverse health effects if used as directed.

However, improper handling can release BeO dust. BeO dust produces chronic pulmonary
damage (berylliosis) and prolonged inhalation of high doses can cause poisoning with
breathing impairment and subsequent death.

4.5.1 Rules When Handling BeO Ceramics


Do not open, mechanically manipulate or destroy parts made from BeO ceramics.
These parts must never be scratched, broken, cut, ground, annealed or sandblasted, not
even under fume extraction hoods.

4.5.2 Identification of Parts Containing BeO Ceramics


Rohde & Schwarz clearly identifies all parts containing BeO ceramics in the electric parts
list, the circuit diagram and the transmitter.

The electric parts list contains the following description:

BERYLLIUMOXID / BERYL- Hinweise beachten Observe Instruction


LIUM OXIDE

The following warning appears in the circuit diagram:

Achtung!
Hinweise zur Sicherheit beim Umgang mit Teilen aus Berylliumoxid-Keramik beachten!
Attention!
Observe safety instructions for handling parts made from beryllium oxide ceramics!

In the transmitter, every module that contains parts made from BeO ceramics is identified
by a warning sign and a label:

3562.0908.72 - 1.12 - EN-5


Chapter 1 Safety

BERYLLIUMOXID / BERYLLIUM OXIDE

Sicherheitshinweise beachten Observe safety instructions

4.5.3 Measures in Case of Breakage and When Disposing of


Waste
Where breakage, mechanical or electrical destruction has produced BeO dust, the dust
must be collected with a damp cloth and sealed in a plastic bag with all the fragments. Al-
ways wear protective gloves.

Attach the hazard symbol and a label to the bag:

Berylliumoxid-Staub
Beryllium oxide dust

Hazard symbol: skull


and crossbones

Ensure that bags are disposed of in accordance with national waste disposal regulations.

Devices containing BeO ceramics that have been unsoldered must be disposed of in the
same manner. All the manufacturers of parts containing BeO ceramics who are known to
Rohde & Schwarz offer to take back faulty parts without charge.

3562.0908.72 - 1.13 - EN-5


Chapter 1 Safety

3562.0908.72 - 1.14 - EN-5


Broadcasting Division

CHAPTER 2

DESIGN AND FUNCTION

Printed in Germany

3562.0908.72 - 2.1 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

CONTENTS

1 Design and Function ....................................................................... 5


1.1 Power Distribution ........................................................................................14
1.1.1 Main Switch (Power Supply Terminal) .......................................................16
1.1.2 Motor Protection Switches ..........................................................................16
1.1.3 Automatic Line Fuses .................................................................................17
1.1.4 Power Distribution Board ............................................................................18
1.1.5 Auxiliary Power Supply Unit .......................................................................19
1.1.6 Grounding Bolt ...........................................................................................20
1.2 Transmitter Control Unit ..............................................................................20
1.2.1 R&S NetCCU800 ........................................................................................20
1.2.2 Rack Controller ...........................................................................................21
1.3 Connections on Transmitter Top ................................................................23
1.3.1 Modulation Input .........................................................................................23
1.3.2 Parallel Remote-Control Interface ..............................................................25
1.4 Exciter ............................................................................................................28
1.4.1 Exciter ........................................................................................................28
1.4.2 Exciter Switch .............................................................................................29
1.5 Output Stage .................................................................................................29
1.5.1 Power Splitter .............................................................................................34
1.5.2 Amplifier .....................................................................................................35
1.5.3 Combiner ....................................................................................................36
1.5.4 Absorber Block ...........................................................................................37
1.5.5 RF Connecting Cable .................................................................................40
1.5.6 Directional Couplers ...................................................................................40
1.5.7 Test Interface for Customer ........................................................................41
1.6 RF Connector ................................................................................................42
1.7 Cooling System ............................................................................................42
1.7.1 Transmitters R&S NR8210, R&S NR8212 and R&S NR8215 ....................43
1.7.1.1 Cooling Systems .............................................................................................. 43
1.7.1.2 Intake/Exhaust Air Ducts .................................................................................. 47
1.7.1.3 Fan ................................................................................................................... 48
1.7.1.4 Differential Pressure Gages ............................................................................. 48
1.7.1.5 Temperature Sensors ....................................................................................... 49
1.7.2 Transmitters R&S 8202, R&S NR8205 and R&S NR8207 .........................50
1.7.2.1 Intake/Exhaust Air Ducts .................................................................................. 51
1.7.2.2 Fans ................................................................................................................. 52

3562.0908.72 - 2.3 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1.7.2.3 Starting Capacitor ............................................................................................. 53


1.7.2.4 Differential Pressure Gages ............................................................................. 54
1.7.2.5 Temperature Sensors ....................................................................................... 55

2 Specifications ................................................................................ 56
2.1 NR82xx Transmitters ....................................................................................56
2.2 Parallel Remote-Control Interface ...............................................................57
2.3 Performance Data for Cooling System .......................................................58
2.3.1 Internal Fan with Intake Air Supplied by an External Ventilation System ...58
2.3.2 Internal Fan with Air Supplied Through Rear Panel of Transmitter Rack ...59
2.3.3 External Fan with Air Supplied by an External Ventilation System (model
02 24 only) ..................................................................................................61
2.4 Performance Data for Fan Types ................................................................62
2.5 Protection of Electrical System ...................................................................62
2.5.1 Power Failure .............................................................................................62
2.5.2 Power Supply Faults ..................................................................................63
2.5.3 Damage on RF Output Side .......................................................................64
2.5.4 Protection Against Overvoltage from Antenna Cable .................................66
2.6 Protection of Air Supply ..............................................................................66

3562.0908.72 - 2.4 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1 Design and Function

The R&S NR8200 FM transmitter family is used for transmitting broadcast signals in band
II (VHF).

Depending on the configuration, individual transmitters are available in different power


classes and hardware configurations.

Standard transmitter

A transmitter is built into a rack as standard.

Both the power class of the transmitter and its name depend on the number of built-in am-
plifiers:

Name Number of amplifiers Power

R&S NR8202 1 2.5 kW

R&S NR8205 2 5 kW

R&S NR8207 3 7.5 kW

R&S NR8210 4 10 kW

R&S NR8212 5 12.5 kW

R&S NR8215 6 15 kW

Note For reasons inherent in the design, there are differences in the way the R&S NR8215 is
configured compared to the other transmitters in the family. These differences are men-
tioned in the manual.

3562.0908.72 - 2.5 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Fig. 1 R&S NR8200 transmitter - modules

1) Power distribution
2) Transmitter control unit
3) Connections on transmitter top
4) Exciter
5) Output stage
6) RF connector
7) Test equipment
8) Cooling system in NR8210, NR8212 and NR8215 transmitters
9) Cooling system in NR8202, NR8205 and NR8207 transmitters

3562.0908.72 - 2.6 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Fig. 2 R&S NR8215 transmitter - modules (here with optional fan silencer)

1) Power distribution
2) Transmitter control unit
3) Connections on transmitter top
4) Exciter

3562.0908.72 - 2.7 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

5) Output stage
6) RF connector
7) Test equipment (hidden behind absorber)
8) Cooling system (exhaust air duct and fan with silencer; intake air duct hidden on the right)
9) Absorber
10) Absorber cooling system (fan and intake/exhaust air ducts)

The R&S NR8200 transmitter consists of the following units and modules:

Power distribution
Main switch
Motor protection switches
Automatic line fuses
Power distribution board
Auxiliary power supply unit
Grounding bolt
Transmitter control unit
R&S NetCCU800
Rack controller
Connection panel
Exciter
Exciters (1 to 2)
Exciter switch (with exciter standby)
Output stage
Power splitter
Amplifiers (1 to 6)
Combiner
Absorber block
RF connecting cable
Directional couplers
Spare test interface for customer
RF connector
Cooling system
Intake air and exhaust air duct
Fan
Differential pressure gages
Temperature sensors (2) for intake and exhaust air

The R&S NR8215 transmitter contains the following equipment and modules compared to
the R&S NR8200 model:

Output stage
Absorber block with built-in cooling system

Multiple transmitters

A multiple transmitter consists of two transmitters built into a single rack. The transmitters
can be operated simultaneously and independently of one another, or optionally configured
as a 1+1 standby system.

3562.0908.72 - 2.8 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Multiple transmitters are available in two power classes:

Number of amplifiers / transmit-


Power / transmitter
ter

1 2.5 kW

2 5 kW

Note The photograph below shows a 2 x 2.5 kW transmitter with exciter standby. The allocation
of the transmitter components is indicated by A and B.

Fig. 3 R&S NR8200 transmitter - multiple transmitter model 2 x 2.5 kW configured as 1+1 standby system
with NSU

3562.0908.72 - 2.9 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1) Power distribution transmitter A


2) Power distribution transmitter B
3) NSU (optional)
4) Exciter A
5) R&S NetCCU800 A
6) Exciter B
7) R&S NetCCU800 B
8) Two rack controllers (transmitter A left, transmitter B right)
9) Amplifier A
10) Amplifier A (optional for 5 kW)
11) Absorber A (optional for 5 kW)
12) Amplifier B (optional for 5 kW)
13) Absorber B (optional for 5 kW)
14) Absorber B (optional for 5 kW)
15) RF connector transmitter A
16) RF connector transmitter B

Since a multiple transmitter has two independent transmitters built into one rack, all mod-
ules except the fan are included twice.

ATTENTION!
In a multiple transmitter the fan of both power distributions is supplied with current. This
means that both main switches have to be set to 0 in order to de-energize the fan connec-
tion. As a safety precaution the fan connection on the power distribution is fitted with a
cover.

Multiple racks

A multiple rack can be used to produce a 20 kW transmitter or a 30 kW transmitter. Trans-


mitters are built into two racks: type R&S NR8210 (2 x 10 kW = 20 kW) or type R&S NR8215
(2 x 15 kW = 30 kW).

The second rack is mainly used to house the four or six additional amplifiers compared to
the corresponding standard transmitters. In the case of the 20 kW transmitter the 3 dB pow-
er coupler is also housed in the second rack. By contrast, due to design constraints this
power coupler is fitted on the transmitter top in the case of the 30 kW version.

3562.0908.72 - 2.10 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Fig. 4 R&S NR8200 transmitter - 20 kW multiple rack: front view

1) Exciter
2) R&S NetCCU800
3) Rack controller
4) Four amplifiers per rack

3562.0908.72 - 2.11 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Fig. 5 R&S NR8200 transmitter - 20 kW multiple rack: rear view

1) Rack splitter
2) Preamplifier (hidden)
3) 3 dB power coupler for the two RF connectors

Fig. 6 R&S NR8200 transmitter - 20 kW multiple rack: top view

3562.0908.72 - 2.12 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1) RF connector
2) Dummy antenna connector

Fig. 7 R&S NR8200 transmitter - 30 kW multiple rack: front view

1) Exciter
2) R&S NetCCU800
3) Rack controller
4) Six amplifiers per rack

3562.0908.72 - 2.13 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Fig. 8 R&S NR8200 transmitter - 30 kW multiple rack with power coupler on the transmitter top

Since a multiple rack transmitter has one transmitter distributed between two racks, the
modules are arranged differently than in a standard transmitter and additional modules are
built in.

Left rack:
R&S NetCCU800
Additional 3 dB amplifier (since the exciter has to supply eight or twelve amplifiers
instead of the maximum six amplifiers in the case of a standard transmitter)
Additional 3 dB splitter (for dividing the exciter outputs between two racks)
Right rack (20 kW transmitter) or transmitter top (30 kW transmitter):
Additional 3 dB power coupler (for coupling the RF output power from the two racks)
RF connector for the absorber resistor on the power coupler

1.1 Power Distribution

Fig. 9 R&S NR8210 power distribution

1) Main switch (power supply terminal)


2) Motor protection switch
3) Automatic line fuse
4) Power distribution board
5) Auxiliary power supply
6) Grounding bolt

3562.0908.72 - 2.14 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Fig. 10 Power distribution - multiple transmitter model

1) Power distribution transmitter A (left side)


2) Power distribution transmitter B (right side)
3) Main switch (power supply terminal) (2)
4) Automatic line fuse (2)
5) Motor protection switch (2)
6) Power distribution board (2)
7) Fan connection (2)
8) Grounding bolt
9) Auxiliary power supply (2) (hidden)

The power distribution is designed for max. 64 A and contains the following components:

Main switch (power supply terminal)


Motor protection switch
Automatic line fuse
Power distribution board
Auxiliary power supply
Grounding bolt

ATTENTION!
The fan connection for the multiple transmitter is supplied with current by both power dis-
tribution systems. This means that both main switches have to be set to 0 in order to de-
energize the fan connection. As a safety precaution the fan connection on the power distri-
bution is fitted with a cover.

3562.0908.72 - 2.15 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1.1.1 Main Switch (Power Supply Terminal)

Fig. 11 Main switch with protective equipment

The main switch completely disconnects the transmitter rack from the AC supply (on a mul-
tiple transmitter this means both main switches). It is connected to three-phase alternating
current, a neutral conductor and a ground conductor.

Note The main switch can be equipped with a padlock to prevent unauthorized persons from
switching it off and on.

1.1.2 Motor Protection Switches

Fig. 12 Motor protection switches

Motor protection switches Q1 to Q7 (three-phase automatic circuit breakers) are used to


switch amplifiers on and off. As shipped from the factory, the number of motor protection
switches matches the number of built-in amplifiers. The arrangement of amplifiers and mo-
tor protection switches is shown on the cover panel.

Motor protection switch Q8 is used to switch the fan on and off.

The motor protection switches include a setting option for overcurrent. It is factory-set for
all modules in the power supply circuit.

3562.0908.72 - 2.16 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1.1.3 Automatic Line Fuses

Fig. 13 Automatic line fuses (with main switch (left) and a motor protection switch)

The automatic line fuses (automatic circuit breakers) are used to protect the power line and
to switch the following equipment on and off:

R&S NetCCU800 (F1)


Exciter A/B (F2/F3)
Optional add-on equipment (F4)
Auxiliary power supply (F5)
Fan control (F6)
Additional components (F7)
Controller (F8)
External cooling system
Controller for dummy antennas
Optional external fan

The arrangement of the equipment and the automatic line fuses is shown on the cover.

3562.0908.72 - 2.17 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1.1.4 Power Distribution Board

Fig. 14 Power distribution board

The power distribution board is mounted directly on the mounting block of the automatic line
fuses. Transmitter-internal cables are connected (hardwired) to the power distribution
board. They also have connectors for components external to the transmitter (customer in-
terface).

Note The appropriate unequipped connectors are part of the transmitter and are located at the
assigned positions.

The following equipment is or can be connected to the power distribution board:

R&S NetCCU800
Exciter A/B
Fans
External fan
External dummy antenna
Other equipment connected by customer
RF loop
Rack cooling fault
Fault and warning (cooling)
Overcurrent (external cooling)
Connector for rack controller
Absorber fault

3562.0908.72 - 2.18 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1.1.5 Auxiliary Power Supply Unit

Fig. 15 Auxiliary power supply

Fig. 16 Auxiliary power supplies - multiple transmitter model (rear view)

1) Auxiliary power supply transmitter B


2) Auxiliary power supply transmitter A

The primary task of the auxiliary power supply (+12V) is to supply the additional control
components in the rack. The redundancy needed for this auxiliary power is provided via the
exciters, which also deliver a +12V supply.

The following modules are powered by the auxiliary power supply:

Rack controller
CAN bus interface of amplifiers
Switching relay in power distribution
RF rectifier / directional couplers with active transmitter standby
RF rectifier with split transmitters

3562.0908.72 - 2.19 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1.1.6 Grounding Bolt

Fig. 17 Grounding bolt

The grounding bolt makes the connection to the station grounding cable.

Note The rack must be connected to the main grounding terminal in all cases.

1.2 Transmitter Control Unit

Fig. 18 Components of transmitter control unit

1) R&S NetCCU800
2) Rack controller

The transmitter control unit monitors and controls the transmitter to ensure that it functions
properly. It contains the following components:

R&S NetCCU800
Rack controller

1.2.1 R&S NetCCU800

Fig. 19 R&S NetCCU800

3562.0908.72 - 2.20 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

The R&S NetCCU800 transmitter control unit is responsible for both internal and external
communications, including all control functions. The R&S NetCCU800 transmitter control
unit clearly indicates the current status of the transmitter system on a color display.

Note Detailed information on the R&S NetCCU800 can be found in the R&S NetCCU800 manual.

1.2.2 Rack Controller

Fig. 20 Rack controller

The rack controller is used to monitor, control and protect the transmitter rack. It handles
the following functions:

Keeps the transmitter running if the R&S NetCCU800 drops out


Communicates between the R&S NetCCU800 and other components
Monitors the fan (temperature, voltage, pressure)
Receives commands (ON command = amplifier ON, fan ON)
Configures the test points
Switches off the transmitter in the event of danger (e.g. fan failure)
Monitors the interlock circuits for the main transmitter and standby transmitter
Supplies the reference voltage for power level control
Monitors the AC supply voltage (shuts down the transmitter if necessary)
OK signal for the AC supply voltage is generated in the amplifier power supplies
Monitors the temperature of the absorber block

Note The rack controller cannot be operated directly. It is operated via the R&S NetCCU800.

Note A multiple transmitter has two rack controllers built into a single rackmount.

The following table lists all of the interfaces between the rack controller and other transmit-
ter modules:

Name of interface Signals Interface to ...

Flash/DIAG RS232 Internal use only

CAN1 CAN line R&S NetCCU800

3562.0908.72 - 2.21 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Name of interface Signals Interface to ...

CAN2 CAN & Ampl. BUS Flat cable to all amplifiers


Signals:
RESET
VREF_PWR
CAN + and - amplifier ON
Amplifier FAULT
PEAK_AV
where FM RMS measurement
of AC supply voltage is OK

Exciter A +12 V for rack controller Exciter A


Interlock circuit RF loop

Exciter B +12 V for rack controller Exciter B


Interlock circuit RF loop

Power Distribution Various signals Power distribution panel


Signals:
Overcurrent (external cooling)
Warning - cooling 1 and 2
Fault - cooling 1 and 2
Fault - absorber 1 and 2
Interlock circuit of standby
transmitter
+5 V, +12 V aux.
Air pressure 1 and 2

RF checkpoints Analog and switching voltages


Signals:
PEAK/AV switchover for for-
ward and reflected power
+12V supply
RF Probe - test voltage for P
RF for forward and reflected
power
ADJUST - control voltage for
automatic reflected power
adjustment

Temperature Analog voltages Temperature sensors


for intake air and exhaust air

3562.0908.72 - 2.22 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1.3 Connections on Transmitter Top

Fig. 21 Connectors

1) Modulation input
2) Parallel remote control interface

The connections are on the transmitter top in the form of the following components:

Modulation input
Parallel remote-control interface (optional; illustration shows two possible installation
positions)
Connection panel A or B (with n+1 system)

1.3.1 Modulation Input

Fig. 22 Modulation input

The modulation input is used as a customer interface for all baseband connections of a VHF
FM transmitter. It connects the connecting points provided by the transmitter operator to the

3562.0908.72 - 2.23 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

signal connections of the FM exciter. In the case of FM transmitters configured with the aid
of an exciter standby, the input signals are passively split between exciters A and B.

The modulation input provides the following connection options:

No. Label Type Connector

X11L LINKS/MPX XLR, 3-contact Analog audio (left channel) or MPX


LEFT/MPX

X11R RECHTS XLR, 3-contact Analog audio (right channel)


RIGHT

X21 DIGITAL AUDIO XLR, 3-contact Digital audio or AES/EBU


AES/EBU

X12 RDS BNC RDS input

X13 PILOT BNC Pilot-tone output

X14 AUX2 (SCA2) BNC Data input

X15 AUX3 (SCA3) BNC Data input

Table 23 Customer interfaces at modulation input

Analog audio inputs

The modulation input has two equal-priority analog audio inputs:

LINKS/MPX (LEFT/MPX)
RECHTS (RIGHT)

The LEFT/MPX and RIGHT AF input connectors are designed as standardized XLR con-
nectors. Resistor networks distribute the signals between the exciters with almost no inter-
active effects. The audio signal can be fed symmetrically to pin 2 and 3. Pin 1 is ground in
each case. The inputs can be switched to an impedance of 600 via pin 2. An external
stereo coder can be connected to the left channel in place of the line for the left stereo chan-
nel, and will feed in the complete multiplex signal (MPX signal).

Digital audio inputs

The modulation input has a digital audio input - DIGITAL AUDIO or AES/EBU.

The digital audio signal, which is standardized to AES/EBU, can be fed symmetrically to pin
2 and 3. Pin 1 is ground in each case. The input resistance is an impedance of 110 in the
case of the AES/EBU input, provided at least one exciter is connected to the module.

PILOT

If external modulators are used, a standardized 19 kHz squarewave signal for synchroniza-
tion of the modulators is provided at the BNC output socket PILOT. The pilot signal of the
currently active exciter is always fed to the PILOT BNC connector via an internal relay. This
ensures correct phase synchronization. The switching command is sent by the R&S

3562.0908.72 - 2.24 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

NetCCU800 via the X4 female connector. The RF exciter switch is to be linked to connector
X5 if an exciter standby system is configured.

Additional signals (AUX inputs)

The RDS (AUX1), AUX2 and AUX3 ports are provided with 50 BNC connectors. All three
AUX inputs are of equal priority. Additional information such as RDS, DARC, TMC and so
on can be fed in at these inputs.

Parameters

All relevant parameters (impedances, levels, frequency deviations, etc.) can be adjusted at
the R&S NetCCU800 with the aid of software. They are adjusted electronically in the R&S
SU800 exciter.

1.3.2 Parallel Remote-Control Interface

Fig. 24 Parallel remote-control interface

The parallel remote-control interface is used to operate the transmitter from a remote loca-
tion via parallel wire connections (not a computer interface). You can send commands (ON,
OFF, MONO, STEREO, etc) or receive status messages from the transmitter (TRANSMIT-
TER IS ON, TRANSMITTER IS SET TO MONO, TRANSMITTER IS SET TO FREQUEN-
CY) from a remote workstation.

No. Designation Type Connection Remarks

X101A Commands to D-Sub, Command line The module has optocoupler


X101B transmitter female inputs floating with respect to
(25- 0 V. 0 V floating is applied to
contact) pin 24 and 25.
(as per command line)

Commands 1 - 16 to X101A
pin 1 - 16

Commands 17 - 32 to X101B
pin 1 - 16

3562.0908.72 - 2.25 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

No. Designation Type Connection Remarks

X201A Messages D-Sub, Relay outputs The module has normally-


X201B from transmit- male open (NO) contacts and
ter (25- changeover (C) contacts for
contact) messages.
Messages 1 - 9 and 76 are
applied to X201A.
Messages 10 - 18 and 77 are
applied to X201B.

NO contacts are available for


message 1 - 6 and 10 - 15;
all others have C contacts.

X203A Messages D-Sub, Relay outputs The module has normally-


X203B from transmit- male open (NO) contacts and
ter (25- changeover (C) contacts for
contact) messages.
Messages 19 - 24 and 78 are
applied to X203A.
Messages 28 - 33 and 79 are
applied to X203B.

NO contacts are available for


message 19 - 24 and 28 -
33; all others have C con-
tacts.

X205A Messages D-Sub, Relay outputs The module has normally-


X205B male open (NO) contacts and
(25- changeover (C) contacts for
contact) messages.
Messages 37 - 46 are
applied to X205A.
Messages 47 - 56 are
applied to X205B.

NO contacts are available for


message 37 - 42 and 47 -
52; all others have C con-
tacts.

X207A Messages D-Sub, Relay outputs The module has normally-


X207B male open (NO) contacts and
(25- changeover (C) contacts for
contact) messages.
Messages 57 - 66 are
applied to X207A.
Messages 67 - 80 are
applied to X205B.

NO contacts are available for


message 57 - 66 and 67 -
72; all others have C con-
tacts.

Table 25 Parallel remote-control interface (optional), customer interfaces

3562.0908.72 - 2.26 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Communication between remote-control interface and transmitter

Data is exchanged with the R&S NetCCU800 transmitter control unit via an internal CAN
bus. The R&S NetCCU800 also provides the operating voltage for the remote-control inter-
face.

CAN bus

The remote-control interface has an internal 9-contact CAN bus D-Sub male connector X1
and a 9-contact CAN bus D-Sub female connector X11. The module receives its power sup-
ply (+12V) via the CAN bus male connector X1.

Single transmitters and standby systems

In a single transmitter, the remote-control interface is directly connected to the R&S


NetCCU800 via the CAN bus male connector X1. The X11 female connector remains free.

In standby systems the CAN bus is connected to further n+1 modules via X11.

Connectors for connecting remote-control equipment

Special D-Sub tandem connectors are used. For example, X201A and X201B are the des-
ignation for an X201 connector.

The designation of the connector pin indicates the respective half of the tandem connector.

Example:

Command 1 is applied to connector X101, pin 1A. The command can be input at connector
pin 1 of connector 101A.

Command inputs

All command inputs are operated via optocouplers with a floating supply voltage that is gen-
erated on the module. A command input becomes active by means of a connection to the
common command line. Both continuous signals and pulse signals are permitted. With
pulse signals, a minimum pulse length of 100 ms must be ensured. With continuous oper-
ation, the signal which became active last is rejected in the case of mutually exclusive sig-
nals.

Example:

The command TRANSMITTER ON is valid and the command TRANSMITTER OFF is giv-
en. The command TRANSMITTER OFF remains invalid for as long as the first command
ON is active.

The command inputs are distributed between two 25-contact D-Sub female connectors
(X101A, X101B).

Status outputs

All status outputs are implemented by means of floating relay contacts. A message is valid
when the contact is in its closed state. NO contacts and, to a limited extent, normally-closed

3562.0908.72 - 2.27 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

(NC) contacts are available for this purpose. Relays with bistable switching characteristics
are reserved for local/remote messages from the respective function groups.

The module can be used universally for FM, DAB and TV transmitters. It contains numbered
commands COMMAND 1 to COMMAND 32 and numbered status outputs MESSAGE 1 to
MESSAGE 80.

Assignment to transmitter functions

The messages or commands are assigned to the transmitter functions according to the
used configuration via a routing program stored in the higher-level control unit. During the
configuration phase, this program assigns the command inputs and status outputs their log-
ical meaning according to the functional use of the module.

1.4 Exciter

Fig. 26 Equipment in exciter unit (here: with exciter standby)

1) Exciter
2) Exciter switch

The exciter unit contains the following components:

Exciter (1x or 2x with exciter standby)


Exciter switch (only with exciter standby)

1.4.1 Exciter

Fig. 27 R&S SU800 exciter

The R&S SU800 FM exciter is a digital FM exciter that combines the good quality provided
by analog exciters with the reliability offered by modern digital signal processing.

All of the signal processing, including the FM modulation, is digital. The digital technology
and modern D/A converters ensure that the requirements specified in international and na-
tional standards with respect to all quality parameters are fulfilled.

3562.0908.72 - 2.28 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

On the input side, the exciter processes analog as well as digital audio data. Since analog
and digital audio are connected in parallel, the signal feed can be changed from analog to
digital at any time by means of the installed software.

The analog audio can be fed in either as AF (left + right) or as multiplex (MPX). A separate
AES/EBU interface is available for connecting digital audio data. The exciter also has three
other analog inputs for feeding in RDS, SCA and DARC signals.

Note Detailed information on the exciter can be found in the exciter manual.

1.4.2 Exciter Switch

Fig. 28 Exciter switch

Note The exciter switch is included in transmitters with the exciter standby option (two exciters).

The exciter switch switches to the standby exciter (Exciter B) in the following cases:

when there is a fault on the main exciter


on manual switchover via the R&S NetCCU800 (e.g. by operating personnel)

Due to its broad frequency bandwidth, the exciter switch is suitable for all transmitter sys-
tems in the frequency bands I (TV-VHF), II (FM), III (TV-VHF/DAB), IV and V (TV-UHF) and
the L band (DAB). All modulation modes (DVB-T, ATSC, ATV-Combined, DAB and FM) can
be transmitted.

The 2-way switch consists of 4 bistable RF relays. The RF relay is controlled via a bistable
relay, which also reports the position of the switch on the transmitter control unit.

The exciter switch is controlled by the R&S NetCCU800.

1.5 Output Stage

The output stage components can be designed and arranged in different ways, depending
on the transmitter model. The output stages of the following transmitter models are illustrat-
ed below:

3562.0908.72 - 2.29 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Output stage for R&S NR8202 to R&S NR8212 transmitters


Output stage for R&S NR8215 transmitter
Output stage - multiple transmitter model
Output stage - multiple rack model

Fig. 29 R&S NR8202 to R&S NR8212 transmitters: output stage components

1) Amplifier
2) Absorber
3) Combiner
4) Power splitter
5) RF connecting line
6) Directional coupler
7) Test interface for customer

3562.0908.72 - 2.30 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Fig. 30 R&S NR8215 transmitter: output stage components

1) Amplifier
2) Absorber

3562.0908.72 - 2.31 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Fig. 31 Multiple transmitter model: output stage components

1) Amplifier A
2) Amplifier A (optional for 5 kW)
3) Absorber A (optional for 5 kW)
4) Amplifier B
5) Amplifier B (optional for 5 kW)
6) Absorber B (optional for 5 kW)
7) Combiner A (optional for 5 kW)
8) Combiner B (optional for 5 kW)
9) RF supply cable transmitter B
10) RF supply cable transmitter A

Fig. 32 Multiple rack model: output stage components (front view)

3562.0908.72 - 2.32 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1) 2 x 4 amplifiers
2) Absorber

Fig. 33 Multiple rack model: output stage components (rear view)

1) Combiner
2) Splitter
3) Rack splitter
4) RF connector (2x)
5) RF connector for both racks
6) Preamplifier (hidden)
7) Coupler for RF connectors

3562.0908.72 - 2.33 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Fig. 34 Multiple rack model: Coupler for RF connectors

The output stage contains the following components:

Power splitter
Amplifier
Combiner
Absorber
RF connecting line
Directional couplers (internal test points for forward and reflected power)
Customer checkpoint
Multiple rack splitter (multiple rack only)
RF coupler (multiple rack only)
Preamplifier (multiple rack only)

1.5.1 Power Splitter

Fig. 35 Splitter for standard transmitter (above left). Splitter (lt) and multiple rack splitter (rt) (above right)

1) X1: Input from exciter switch or RF out (exciter)


2) X7: Output to adjacent rack (from splitter connection X1)
3) X2: Output to rack (from splitter connection X1)

3562.0908.72 - 2.34 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

The power splitter receives the RF signal from the exciter and divides the signal between
the amplifiers of the output stage.

The multiple rack splitter receives the RF signal from the exciter and forwards it to both rack
splitters.

Depending on the power of the transmitter, the splitter is either integrated with the combiner
(5 kW transmitter) or joined to the combiner by a flange (7.5 kW to 15 kW transmitter).

1.5.2 Amplifier

Fig. 36 R&S VU825 amplifier

The FM audio radio signal which the exciter delivers and the splitter divides is boosted by
each amplifier to a power of 2.5 kW nominal. A number of amplifiers can be connected in
parallel via the combiner to generate up to 15 kW of transmitter output power in a single
rack.

Information on the operating status of the amplifiers is transmitted to the R&S NetCCU800
via the rack controller. The number of amplifiers in the transmitter depends on the transmit-
ter power.

Note Detailed information on the amplifier can be found in the amplifier manual.

3562.0908.72 - 2.35 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1.5.3 Combiner

Fig. 37 Combiner

1) 90 coupler (5 kW)
2) 0 coupler (in this case: 10 kW)

The combiner merges the individual signals amplified in the output stage together and
sends the combined signal on the coaxial RF connecting line. If an amplifier fails (fault, am-
plifier replacement), the combiner diverts the excess power to the absorber.

The transmitter is provided with a 5 kW combiner or a 7.5 to 15 kW combiner, depending


on the power class.

The 5 kW combiner is a 90 coupler on which the "triplate" lines are coupled via the broad
sides of the unit. The lines consist of solid aluminum lines 2 mm thick and 8.5 mm wide, and
their dimensions are such that all-round matching of 50 (VSWR) is obtained.

The feed lines to the 3 dB coupler unit are equal in length so that the supplied signals will
have a phase difference of 90, in order that powers can be added and no power is applied
to the absorber.

This coupler is flange-mounted to the rear panel behind the amplifiers in the transmitter. The
amplifiers and the absorber block to be used connect directly with the coupler.

The coupling structure has the following connectors:

3 x 7/16
X1 input (2700W) from amplifier 1
X2 input (2700W) from amplifier 2
X3 output to absorber
1 5/8 SMS
X20 output (5kW)

3562.0908.72 - 2.36 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

The coupler has a flange for connecting a cooling-air hose and is supplied with cooling air
from the transmitter rack. The internal coupling losses are approximately 50W.

The combiner (90 coupler) in 5 kW transmitters has an integrated splitter.

The 7.5 to 15 kW combiner is produced as a 0 coupler. To ensure that the coupler func-
tions correctly, all of the input signals must have the same phase and amplitude. The cou-
pler can be equipped with options that allow power of 7.5 kW to 15 kW to be generated.

The coupler has a sandwich structure which consists of three layers:

Layer 1
In the first layer, 50 triplate lines are arranged in a cavity in such a way that all lines
have the identical electrical length. The lines consist of aluminum meanders 2 mm thick
and 7.8 mm wide. These 50 lines conduct the RF power from the coupler inputs to a
distribution point (insulated bushing through the cavity walls).
Layer 2
In layer 2 there is a coupling meander which is available in 4 versions (3, 4, 5 and 6 in-
puts). This meander has a laser-cut structure consisting of various lines each lambda/4
in length. The characteristic impedances are other than 50 .
Layer 3
In the third layer, balun lines have been arranged in a duct . These lines function as a
1:1 high-frequency transformer and at the same time as a rebalancing device between
the balanced supply from the coupling meander and the unbalanced outputs (load bal-
ancing resistors).

The dimensions of all the lines are such that all-round matching of 50 (VSWR) is ob-
tained. The aluminum housing consists of a milled shell half and various sheet metal ducts.

Note If an amplifier fails, the operating conditions of the remaining amplifiers remain virtually un-
changed. In this case however, loss energy is radiated from the associated load balancing
ports (also known as absorber resistor ports, or load balancing resistor ports).

The combiner is flange-mounted to the rear panel behind the amplifiers in the transmitter.
The amplifiers and the absorber block to be used (up to 12.5 kW) connect directly with the
coupler.

In transmitters with power classes 7.5 kW to 15 kW the splitter is joined to the combiner (0
coupler) by a flange.

1.5.4 Absorber Block


The absorber converts excess power into heat, for instance when an amplifier has devel-
oped a fault or is being replaced.

In the standard configuration the absorber block is located at the front of the transmitter be-
tween the amplifier stage and the power distribution, and is directly connected to the com-
biner via automatic connectors (input ports).

3562.0908.72 - 2.37 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Fig. 38 Absorber for R&S NR8200 transmitter

In transmitter model R&S NR8215 the absorber is located at the rear of the transmitter and
is connected to the combiner by male connectors.

Fig. 39 Absorber for R&S NR8215 transmitter with built-in fan system

1) Absorber consisting of 2 absorber plates


2) RF cable to coupler
3) Absorber monitoring cable
4) Control cable for switching on the fan
5) AC supply for fan (dismantled)
6) Fan
7) Air intake duct
8) Exhaust duct

Depending on the number of installed amplifiers, the transmitter has an absorber block with
a different power level and a different number of input ports (7/16 female connectors).

3562.0908.72 - 2.38 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Number of amplifi-
Model Transmitter power Input port
ers

Model 05 5 kW 2 1 input - X1
(90coupler)

Model 07 7.5 kW 3 3 inputs - X1 - X3


(0coupler)

Model 10 10 kW 4 4 inputs - X1 - X4
(0coupler)

Model 12 12.5 kW 5 5 inputs - X1 - X5


(0coupler)

Model 02 15 kW 6 6 inputs - X11 - X16


(0coupler)

Eight 50 500 W power resistors are used for each input. These resistors are arranged on
the heat sink in such a way that the heat produced when certain transmitter faults occur
(amplifier failure or shutdown) is distributed very evenly.

The resistors are connected together using printed conductors on a glass-fiber reinforced
Teflon PCB. The input impedance is optimized at 50 . The return loss should be <-26dB
(typ. -30 to -32dB).

Normally, the thermoswitches are always closed. The temperature reserves are so high that
the thermoswitches do not open even in the most unfavorable cases at maximum intake air
temperature (+45C). However, if in addition the transmitter ventilation system is working
incorrectly (insufficient air flow, possibly due to a dirty air filter or a faulty fan) these switches
protect the power resistors from destruction.

Note If a contact is opened, high-frequency emission in the transmitter is interrupted.

3562.0908.72 - 2.39 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1.5.5 RF Connecting Cable

Fig. 40 RF connecting cable

The coaxial RF connecting line carries the high-frequency signal from the combiner to the
transmitter output.

The supply cable is available in four versions (2.5 kW, 5 kW, 7.5 to 12.5 kW, 15 kW). These
differ from one another in the following respects:

Adjustment of the used directional couplers according to transmitter power


Input side fitting (2.5 kW: 7/16 connector; 5 to 12.5 kW: 1 5/8" SMS; 15 kW: RL60)
Length of the line

A 1 5/8" EIA flange connection is fitted on the output side for the 2.5 kW to 12.5 kW config-
uration. A 3 1/8" EIA flange connection is fitted for the 15 kW model.

1.5.6 Directional Couplers

Fig. 41 Directional coupler

1) Directional coupler for forward power


2) Directional coupler for reflected power
3) Test interface for customer

3562.0908.72 - 2.40 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

The transmitter has two directional couplers to measure forward and reflected power. The
value for reflected power is compared to the forward value in the transmitter control unit
(R&S NetCCU800) and monitored.

The forward directional coupler is adjusted to an output level of 10.5 dBm at the nominal
output power of the transmitter (97.5 MHz).

The reflected directional coupler is adjusted to an output level of 20.5 dBm at the nominal
output power of the transmitter (97.5 MHz).

Note All directional couplers are set to a different coupling attenuation depending on the respec-
tive power class.

Note The transmitter is switched off because of reflection if the standing wave ratio exceeds 3.0
after being checked three times. If the value S exceeds 1.5, the forward power is reduced
in advance.

1.5.7 Test Interface for Customer


The customer checkpoint can be used to measure the forward or reflected power or to con-
nect measuring equipment for quality measurement purposes.

The customer checkpoint contains 2 N connectors for forward and reflected power. It con-
sists of an RF detector circuit in the following models:

02 - Band II (VHF)
03 - Band III (VHF)
04 - Band IV (UHF)

The customer checkpoint is always adjusted so that the level is +10 dBm at 50 (97.5MHz)
at transmitter nominal power.

3562.0908.72 - 2.41 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1.6 RF Connector

Fig. 42 RF connector

The RF connector is the transmitter's interface to the antenna and routes the high-frequen-
cy signals to the following components:

Antenna
Dummy antenna
Multiple combining filter antenna
Splitter antenna
Band filter antenna

1.7 Cooling System

Various cooling systems can be used for the transmitters of the R&S NR8200 transmitter
family. The possible cooling systems are described in writing and explained using illustra-
tions:

for the transmitters R&S NR8210, R&S NR8212 and R&S NR8215
for the transmitters R&S NR8202, R&S NR8205 and R&S NR8207

Note The photos show just one of these cooling systems.


For a description of the cooling system for the absorber in transmitter model R&S NR8215,
please refer to the description of the absorber model.

3562.0908.72 - 2.42 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1.7.1 Transmitters R&S NR8210, R&S NR8212 and R&S NR8215

Fig. 43 Cooling system

1) Intake air duct


2) Exhaust air collector
3) Fan
4) Temperature sensor

The cooling system prevents the transmitter from overheating and contains the following
components:

Intake air/exhaust air ducts


Fan
Differential pressure gage (see below)
Temperature sensors for intake and exhaust air (see below)

1.7.1.1 Cooling Systems

Intake and exhaust ducts can be connected to an external ventilation system on the floor
and/or top of the transmitter. The intake air can also be fed straight in from the surrounding
air through the rear of the transmitter rack (rear panel of filter). The ventilation fan is avail-
able as a built-in version or an external version.

3562.0908.72 - 2.43 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Fig. 44 Configurations for intake air and exhaust air

1) Intake air
2) Exhaust air

Built-in fan with intake air supplied by an external ventilation system

Fig. 45 Built-in fan - external ventilation system

1) Fan
2) Amplifier
3) Pipe system
4) Filter

3562.0908.72 - 2.44 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Built-in fan with air supplied through rear panel of transmitter rack

Fig. 46 Built-in fan - ventilation through rear panel

1) Fan
2) Amplifier
3) Pipe system
4) Filter

3562.0908.72 - 2.45 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

External fan with air supplied by an external ventilation system

Fig. 47 External fan - external ventilation system

1) Fan
2) Amplifier
3) Pipe system
4) Filter
5) Intake air
6) Warm air supply

Note The performance data for the ventilation systems and fans is provided in section 2 ("Spec-
ifications") of this chapter.

3562.0908.72 - 2.46 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1.7.1.2 Intake/Exhaust Air Ducts

Fig. 48 Air intake/exhaust ducts

The intake air/exhaust air ducts ensure unobstructed air circulation inside the transmitter
rack by routing filtered air to the transmitter (intake air) and by guiding hot air out of the
transmitter (exhaust air). Their outlets form the interface between the station's ventilation
system and the transmitter.

Note The intake air/exhaust air openings are located on the top and/or bottom of the rack, de-
pending on your order specifications. The intake air can also be fed in through the rear (sur-
rounding air) of the transmitter rack.

3562.0908.72 - 2.47 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1.7.1.3 Fan

Fig. 49 Fan

In its standard configuration, the transmitter rack contains one fan which prevents the trans-
mitter from overheating. If the fan is faulty, the system issues a fault message and the rack
controller switches off the transmitter.

Note If the pressure loss in the ventilation system exceeds the permitted limits, an external back-
up fan must be connected.

1.7.1.4 Differential Pressure Gages

Fig. 50 R&S NR8200 differential pressure gage and multiple transmitter model (2 differential pressure gag-
es)

3562.0908.72 - 2.48 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

The differential pressure gages (diaphragm switches) measure the pressure difference be-
tween the intake air duct and the surrounding atmosphere.

1.7.1.5 Temperature Sensors

Fig. 51 R&S NR8200 temperature sensors

Fig. 52 Temperature sensors - multiple transmitter model

1) Temperature sensor (intake air) transmitter A


2) Temperature sensor (intake air) transmitter B
3) Temperature sensor (exhaust air) transmitter A (on exhaust duct)
4) Temperature sensor (exhaust air) transmitter B (perspective: side and rear view - top half of rack)

The temperature sensors measure the absolute intake air and exhaust air temperature in
oC for display on the R&S NetCCU800 and for monitoring in the rack controller.

Note If the temperatures exceeds 65 oC, the rack controller switches off the transmitter due to
the risk of overheating.

3562.0908.72 - 2.49 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1.7.2 Transmitters R&S 8202, R&S NR8205 and R&S NR8207

Fig. 53 Cooling system

1) Intake air duct


2) Exhaust air duct
3) Fan
4) Starting capacitor
5) Differential pressure gages
6) Temperature sensor

The cooling system consists of two built-in fans on active standby and contains the following
components:

Intake/exhaust air ducts


Fans (2)
Starting capacitors (2)
Differential pressure gages (2)
Temperature sensors (2)

3562.0908.72 - 2.50 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1.7.2.1 Intake/Exhaust Air Ducts

Fig. 54 Intake air duct (1) and exhaust air duct (2)

The air from the intake air duct is drawn in by the fans and fed to the distribution shaft. The
distribution shaft supplies the necessary cooling air to each amplifier. The heated air is rout-
ed to an air collecting shaft on the opposite site of the amplifier and expelled via the exhaust
air duct.

Note The intake/exhaust air outlets are located either on the top or bottom of the rack, depending
on your order specifications.
If the air intake is at the bottom, there is no intake air duct. The connecting flange is then
directly underneath the fan box.

If the exhaust air is fed downward, the absorber unit is laid so that it faces downward, and
it opens out into the exhaust air connection.

3562.0908.72 - 2.51 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1.7.2.2 Fans

Fig. 55 Fans

The transmitter rack has 2 fans as standard. They supply the transmitter with sufficient cool-
ing air. If one of the fans is faulty, a warning is sent to the control unit and the transmitter
continues to function. If both fans fail, the rack controller switches off the rack in question.
The transmitter signals a cooling fault.

3562.0908.72 - 2.52 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1.7.2.3 Starting Capacitor

Fig. 56 Starting capacitor

Each motor is equipped with an external starting capacitor.

3562.0908.72 - 2.53 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1.7.2.4 Differential Pressure Gages

Fig. 57 Differential pressure gages

The differential pressure gages (diaphragm switches) measure the pressure difference at
each fan between the fan flange (outlet) and the surrounding atmosphere. This allows the
fault status of each individual fan to be sent to the transmitter controller unit.

3562.0908.72 - 2.54 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

1.7.2.5 Temperature Sensors

Fig. 58 Temperature sensor

The temperature sensors measure the absolute intake and exhaust air temperature in C.
The temperature is displayed on the R&S NetCCU800 and used for monitoring purposes in
the rack controller.

Note If the exhaust air temperature is higher than 65 C, the rack controller switches off the rack
to prevent overheating.

3562.0908.72 - 2.55 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

2 Specifications

2.1 NR82xx Transmitters

Number of amplifiers 1 to 6

RF output power 2.5 kW to 15 kW

Connector 1 5/8 EIA; 15 kW: 3 1/8

Weight 250 kg to 480 kg (depending on type)

Dimensions 600 mm x 2000 mm x 800 mm; 15 kW: 600 x 2000 x 1200

Power consumption with- 4.4 kVA to 20.0 kVA; 15 kW: 24 kVA


out fan for VSWR = 1
(power consumption data
for operation with
respective fan specified
in Chapter 3.5)

Air throughput 250 m3/h per amplifier unit or absorber unit

Frequency range 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz

Internal adjustment menu-controlled in 10 kHz steps

External adjustment 8 frequencies, user-selectable

Frequency drift <200 Hz/3 months

Center frequency drift at typ. 0 Hz


75 kHz frequency devi-
ation

Nominal frequency devi- 40 kHz to 150 kHz, adjustable


ation

Power supply 3 x 400 VAC 15%, three-phase switching; 50 Hz / 60 Hz

Deviation limitation 40 kHz to 150 kHz, adjustable

Max. frequency deviation 150 kHz

Emission class F3E, stereo, and mono

Stereo emission in line with ITU-R BS.450-3

Preemphasis 50 s / 75 s

RF output

Nominal impedance 50

Audio input

3562.0908.72 - 2.56 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Connector XLR on transmitter top / BNC for MPX

Control interfaces, remote-control interfaces

BIT bus optional

Parallel remote-control optional


interface

TCP/IP HTTP, SNMP

Auxiliary frequency

Pilot-tone frequency 19 kHz

Amplitude 1 V (pp) + 0.1 V and 1 k; unbalanced

Pilot-tone deviation 0 Hz to 15 kHz, adjustable in 100 Hz steps

Output BNC

General information

AC supply voltage 380 V or 400 V or 415 V, 3-phase + N

AC supply frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz

Permissible voltage vari- +15 % / -15 %


ation

Power ratio >0.9

Cooling air cooling with built-in fan or external system

Maximum pressure drop 800 Pa


in cooling system

Operating temperature +1 oC to +45 oC


range

Storage temperature -40 oC to + 70 oC


range

Permissible relative <95 % at 26 oC


humidity

Permissible external <10 V/m


electric field strength

Altitude 2000 m above sea level

2.2 Parallel Remote-Control Interface

Operating voltage 12 V DC

3562.0908.72 - 2.57 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Current drain 1 A max.

CAN interface CAN V2.0B at 1 Mb/s

Number of command inputs 32

Insulation voltage 3000 V rms

Max. external line resistance (referenced to common 50


command line)

Number of status outputs 80 (of which 5 have bistable


characteristics)

Dielectric strength of contact/coil 1000 V rms

2.3 Performance Data for Cooling System

2.3.1 Internal Fan with Intake Air Supplied by an External Ventila-


tion System

R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S


NR8202 NR8205 NR8207 NR8210 NR8212 NR8215

Output 2.5 kW 5 kW 7.5 kW 10 kW 12.5 kW 15 kW


power

Exhaust 4.2 12.5 16.7 21.7 25 25


air flow m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min
rate at
1000 hPa
pressure

Intake air 5 15 19.2 24.2 29.2 29.2


flow rate at m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min
1000 hPa
pressure

Fan type D064a) D064a) D066a) D066 a) D07 D07 model


04 24

G2E180 -/- -/- model


05 25

Number of 1 1 1 1 1 1 model
fans 04 24

2 2 2 2 -/- -/- model


05 25

3562.0908.72 - 2.58 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S


NR8202 NR8205 NR8207 NR8210 NR8212 NR8215

Min. diam- 160 mm 180 mm 200 mm 200 mm 250 mm 250 mm model


eter of 04 24
external
intake air 250 mm 250mm b) -/- -/- model
duct 05 25

Min. diam- 160 mm 180 mm 200 mm 200 mm 250 mm 250 mm model


eter of 04 24
external
exhaust air 250 mm 250mmb) -/- -/- model
duct 05 25

Max. pres- 300 Pa 200 Pa 250 Pa 200 Pa 200 Pa 200 Pa model


sure resis- 04 24
tance of air
intake sys-
tem

Max. resis- 300 Pa 200 Pa 200 Pa 200 Pa 200 Pa 200 Pa model


tance of air 04 24
exhaust
system

Max. resis- 200 Pa 200 Pa 150 Pa 100 Pab) -/- -/- model
tance of 05 25
entire air
intake and
air exhaust
system

a) Last production in may 2008.


b) An additional backup fan may be necessary depending on environment variables.

Note The intake air must be filtered to quality grade G3 (DIN EN 779) - corresponds to EU3.
Pressure drop at filter max. 150 Pa.
The pressure resistance values for the filters apply to original filters from the range of trans-
mitter accessories.

2.3.2 Internal Fan with Air Supplied Through Rear Panel of Trans-
mitter Rack

R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S


NR8202 NR8205 NR8207 NR8210 NR8212 NR8215

Output 2.5 kW 5 kW 7.5 kW 10 kW 12.5 kW 15 kW


power

Exhaust 4.2 12.5 16.7 20.8 25 25


air flow m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min
rate at
1000 hPa
pressure

3562.0908.72 - 2.59 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S


NR8202 NR8205 NR8207 NR8210 NR8212 NR8215

Intake air 5 15 19.2 24.2 29.2 29.2


flow rate at m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min
1000 hPa
pressure

Fan type D064a) D064a) D066a) D066 a) D07 D07 model


04 24

G2E180 -/- -/- model


05 25

Number of 1 1 1 1 1 1 model
fans 04 24

2 2 2 2 -/- -/- model


05 25

Filter type G3, F7 G3, F7 G3, F7 G3, F7 G3, F7 G3, F7


Size (mm) 1000 x 1000 x 1000 x 1000 x 1000 x 1000 x
350 350 350 350 350 350

Min. diam- 160 mm 180 mm 200 mm 200 mm 250 mm 250 mm model


eter of 04 24
external
exhaust air 250 mm 250mm b) -/- -/- model
duct 05 25

Max. pres- 100 Pa 200 Pa 250 Pa 350 Pa 350 Pa 350 Pa model


sure resis- 04 24
tance of
filter (rear 100 Pa 100 Pa 50 Pa 50 Pab) -/- -/- model
of rack) 05 25

Max. resis- 600 Pa 400 Pa 200 Pa 200 Pa 200 Pa 200 Pa model


tance of air 04 24
exhaust
system 100 Pa 100 Pa 50 Pa 50 Pab) -/- -/- model
05 25

a) Last production in may 2008.


b) An additional backup fan may be necessary depending on environment variables.

Note The intake air must be filtered to quality grade G3 (DIN EN 779) - corresponds to EU3.
Pressure drop at filter max. 150 Pa.
The pressure resistance values for the filters apply to original filters from the range of trans-
mitter accessories.

3562.0908.72 - 2.60 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

2.3.3 External Fan with Air Supplied by an External Ventilation


System (model 02 24 only)

R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S


NR8202 NR8205 NR8207 NR8210 NR8212 NR8215

Output 2.5 kW 5 kW 7.5 kW 10 kW 12.5 kW 15 kW


power

Exhaust 4.2 12.5 16.7 20.8 25 25


air flow m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min
rate at
1000 hPa
pressure

Intake air 9.4 19.2 25.8 30 35 35


flow rate at m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min
1000 hPa
pressure

Fan type D060 D064 D066 D066 D07 D07

Number of 1 1 1 1 1 1
fans

Min. diam- 160 mm 180 mm 200 mm 200 mm 250 mm 250 mm


eter of
external
intake air
duct

Min. diam- 160 mm 180 mm 200 mm 200 mm 250 mm 250 mm


eter of
external
exhaust air
duct

Max. pres- 350 Pa 250 Pa 250 Pa 200 Pa 250 Pa 250 Pa


sure resis-
tance of air
intake sys-
tem

Max. resis- 200 Pa 200 Pa 200 Pa 200 Pa 200 Pa 200 Pa


tance of air
exhaust
system

Note The intake air must be filtered to quality grade G3 (DIN EN 779) - corresponds to EU3.
Pressure drop at filter max. 150 Pa.
The pressure resistance values for the filters apply to original filters from the range of trans-
mitter accessories.

3562.0908.72 - 2.61 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

2.4 Performance Data for Fan Types

The installed fan type depends on the transmitter type and the selected cooling system. The
following table lists the fan types and their parameters:

Pres-
Fan Flow rate Voltage Current Power Speed Weight
sure
type [m3/min] [V] [A] [kW] [rpm] (kg)
[Pa]

D060 10 780 208 to 265 / 2.4 to 3.3 / 0.55 2840 10.6


360 to 460 1.4 to 1.9

D060 10 1080 208 to 290 / 3.45 to 3.2 / 0.90 3340 10.6


360 to 500 2.0 to 1.83

D064 20 1060 208 to 265 / 3.4 to 5.2 / 1.1 2800 14.9


360 to 460 1.97 to 3.0

D064 20 1500 208 to 290 / 4.5 to 4.85 / 1.32 3300 14.9


360 to 500 2.6 to 2.8

D066 25 1270 230 / 400 6.2 / 3.6 1.5 2825 18.1

D066 25 1380 277 / 480 6.2 / 3.6 1.8 3390 18.1

D070 35 1380 230 / 400 8.7 / 5.0 2.2 2875 22

D070 35 2050 277 / 480 8.7 / 5.0 2.65 3450 22

G2E180 11 200 230 1.75 0.4 1950 5.6

2.5 Protection of Electrical System

The following section describes the faults that can occur in the electrical system of the
transmitter and how the electrical system is protected against these faults.

2.5.1 Power Failure


The transmitter contains a three phase principal power supply for the output stages and a
single phase auxiliary power supply, together with the exciter and R&S NetCCU800 mod-
ules, which in a typical configuration likewise receive a single phase supply from phase L1.

A distinction is made between short power failures (<0.3s) and long power failures (>0.3s).

The system is always shut down in the event of long power failures. The exciter is then re-
booted and the transmitter is gradually returned to its pre-shutdown state.

Note This does not apply to large systems with switchover units.

Two different scenarios are relevant for short power failures:

3562.0908.72 - 2.62 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Failure of phase L2 or L3.


Shutdown of the amplifier power supplies and message sent to the control unit.

The control unit switches the transmitter to "OFF" for the duration of the power fault. When
the power supply has been restored, the transmitter is switched on again automatically.

With phase L1, a distinction must be made between long and short power failures. With
short power failures, the exciter remains "ON" and the RF is interrupted by the voltage dip
in the amplifier power supply. The transmitter reboots in the case of long interruptions.

Fault Protection mechanism Function

Power failure <0.3s No reaction No reaction

Power failure >0.3 Undervoltage tripping in Shutdown of exciter and amplifier until
exciter and amplifier power is restored

Note The transmitter always returns to the operating mode that it was in prior to the interruption
(automatic restart without manual acknowledgment).

2.5.2 Power Supply Faults


The transmitter has an auxiliary power supply unit in each rack. The amplifier power supply
units are contained in each amplifier plug-in.

The auxiliary power supply unit and amplifier power supply units are switching power supply
units with current-limited output. All lines carrying AC supply voltage and high current are
covered to prevent accidental contact.

If primary-side components fail, the integrated primary fuse responds in all power supply
units. Transfer of primary-side overcurrent to the secondary side is prevented owing to elec-
trical isolation from the transformer.

The principal power supplies in the individual amplifiers are protected input side by motor
protection switches Q2 to Q7. They also have an output current limiter and an output over-
voltage cutoff circuit.

Fault Protection mechanism Function

Damage to R&S Protected by automatic line fuse F1 F1 trips


NetCCU800 power supply

Damage to exciter A power Protected by automatic line fuse F2 F2 trips


supply

Damage to exciter B power Protected by automatic line fuse F3 F3 trips


supply

Overload caused by add-on Protected by automatic line fuse F4 F4 trips


equipment

Damage to aux. supply Protected by automatic line fuse F5 F5 trips

3562.0908.72 - 2.63 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Fault Protection mechanism Function

Short-circuit in control circuit Protected by automatic line fuse F6 F6 trips


of fan contactor K8

Output for customer equip- Protected by automatic line fuse F7 F7 trips


ment X32

Output for customer equip- Protected by automatic line fuse F8 F8 trips


ment X33

Output for customer equip- Protected by automatic line fuse F8 F8 trips


ment X36

Short-circuit in amplifier Protected by motor protection switch Q2 Q2 trips


power supply A1 or feed line

Short-circuit in amplifier Protected by motor protection switch Q3 Q3 trips


power supply A2 or feed line

Short-circuit in amplifier Protected by motor protection switch Q4 Q4 trips


power supply A3 or feed line

Short-circuit in amplifier Protected by motor protection switch Q5 Q5 trips


power supply A4 or feed line

Short-circuit in amplifier Protected by motor protection switch Q6 Q6 trips


power supply A5 or feed line

Short-circuit in amplifier Protected by motor protection switch Q7 Q7 trips


power supply A6 or feed line

Overload or short-circuit at Protected by motor protection switch Q8 Q8 trips


fan E1

Short-circuit in power distri- Protected by assigned backup fuse in low- Backup fuse trips
bution upstream of safety voltage distribution
outputs

2.5.3 Damage on RF Output Side

Fault Protection mechanism Function

VSWR > 3.0 Measurement of forward/reflected Transmitter shutdown


power at transmitter output, calculation after sampling 3 times
of VSWR in control unit, reduction of
nominal value not sufficient

Short-circuit at antenna Measurement of forward/reflected Transmitter shutdown


power at transmitter output, calculation after sampling 3 times
of VSWR in control unit

Open circuit at antenna Measurement of forward/reflected Transmitter shutdown


power at transmitter output, calculation after sampling 3 times
of VSWR in control unit

3562.0908.72 - 2.64 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Fault Protection mechanism Function

Antenna detachment Measurement of forward/reflected Transmitter shutdown


power at transmitter output, calculation after sampling 3 times
of VSWR in control unit

Electrical connection of Capacitive coupling within RF ampli- No connection


operating voltage to inner fier output circuit
conductor of RF output

Power reduction of FM transmitter with VSWR

If the transmitter is operated with mismatched load at a VSWR > 1.5, the transmitter should
not be shut down completely but instead should continue to operate with reduced power. In
this case, the power should be reduced in such a way that amplifiers or absorbers are not
subjected to a thermal or electrical overload.

If the VSWR value exceeds 1.55, the output power is reduced according to the following
formula:

Pforward = Pnominal / VSWR

To prevent uncontrolled fluctuation of the output power at a VSWR of 1.5, the (VSWR-de-
pendent) power reduction is not canceled until the VSWR value has dropped below 1.45
again (hysteresis).

Reduction of the output power at a VSWR > 1.55, however, only becomes effective if the
set nominal value is greater than the calculated reduction value.

Example 1:

Pnominal = 10.0 >>>


kW

Psetpoint = 10.0kW >>> Pforward = 5.0 kW

VSWR = 2.0 >>> Power reduction takes place, since Psetpoint > Pcalculated (5.0 kW)

Example 2:

3562.0908.72 - 2.65 - EN-6


Chapter 2 Design and Function

Pnominal = 10.0 >>>


kW

Psetpoint = 6.0 kW >>> Pforward = 6.0 kW ()

VSWR = 1.6 >>> No power reduction takes place, since Psetpoint < Pcalculated (6.25
kW)

2.5.4 Protection Against Overvoltage from Antenna Cable


An inductance to ground is located in the output of each amplifier. This inductance diverts
overvoltages. The solution comes under lightning protection category III and cannot be
used as the only lightning protection device for the antenna.

Fault Protection mechanism Function

Overvoltage Short-circuit coil in harmonics filter of Shunting of overvolt-


RF amplifier age

Note The transmitter is intended for use in lightning protection zone III (location within a building).
The measures to provide protection for zone I and II must be provided by the customer.

2.6 Protection of Air Supply

The transmitter is air-cooled. Failure of the air supply leads to overtemperature at the RF
amplifiers and their power supply.

The following mechanisms to protect against overtemperature exist:

Fault Protection mechanism Function

Failure of fan caused by fan Tripping of motor protection switch Q8, Shutdown of amplifiers
overcurrent pressure drop causes barometric cell
to respond

Overtemperature at ampli- Overtemperature monitoring of ampli- Shutdown of amplifiers


fier TX1 to TX6 fier responds

Exhaust air temperature Overtemperature monitoring of trans- Shutdown of transmit-


>65C mitter responds ter

Temperature at absorber Temperature monitoring of transmitter Shutdown of transmit-


resistor too high responds (S1/S2 on absorber block) ter

3562.0908.72 - 2.66 - EN-6


Broadcasting Division

CHAPTER 3

INSTALLATION

Printed in Germany

3562.0908.72 - 3.1 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

CONTENTS

1 Equipment Supplied ........................................................................ 5


1.1 Transmitter Components ...............................................................................5
1.2 Accessories Supplied ....................................................................................5

2 Overview ........................................................................................... 6

3 Setting Up Transmitter .................................................................... 7


3.1 Erecting Transmitter Rack .............................................................................7
3.2 Aligning Transmitter Rack .............................................................................7
3.3 Removing Cover Panels ................................................................................7
3.4 Unpacking Components ................................................................................8

4 Ventilation System ........................................................................... 9


4.1 Connecting Intake/Exhaust Air Ducts ..........................................................9
4.1.1 Technical Specifications ...............................................................................9
4.2 Connecting External Fan .............................................................................12
4.3 Checking Ventilation Cover Panels ............................................................12
4.4 Checking Differential Pressure Gages .......................................................13

5 AC Power Supply ........................................................................... 14


5.1 Connecting Transmitter Ground .................................................................15
5.2 Connecting Main Switch ..............................................................................15
5.3 Connecting External Units ...........................................................................17

6 R&S NetCCU800 and Exciter ........................................................ 19


6.1 Preparing Instruments and Transmitter Rack ...........................................19
6.2 Installing Instruments ..................................................................................19

7 Absorber Block .............................................................................. 21


7.1 Absorber for 5 kW to 12.5 kW Transmitters ...............................................21
7.1.1 Preparing Instrument and Transmitter Rack ..............................................21
7.1.2 Installing Absorber Block ............................................................................21
7.2 Absorber for 15 kW Transmitters ................................................................22
7.2.1 Installing Absorber Blocks ..........................................................................22

3562.0908.72 - 3.3 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

8 Amplifiers ....................................................................................... 25
8.1 Installing Amplifiers .....................................................................................25

9 Antenna .......................................................................................... 26
9.1 Connecting Antenna ....................................................................................26
9.2 Connecting Dummy Antenna ......................................................................26

10 Connection Panel .......................................................................... 28


10.1 Installing Modulation Input Cables .............................................................28
10.2 Installing Parallel Remote-Control Interface Cables (Optional) ...............30

3562.0908.72 - 3.4 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

1 Equipment Supplied

In the case of R&S NR8000 transmitters, the following units and modules are already in-
stalled in the rack (depending on the equipment supplied):

Rack controller
Power distribution
Ventilation system (fan prefitted with transport lock)
Splitter (configured)
Combiner (corresponding to power class)
Customer interfaces
RF connector (adjusted)

For shipping reasons, the exciters, R&S NetCCU800, absorbers and all amplifiers are al-
ways supplied separately. These units must be mounted in the rack during installation.

1.1 Transmitter Components

The transmitter includes the following components:

Transmitter rack (preassembled)


Test points (adjusted)
R&S VU825 amplifiers (quantity depends on power class)
Absorber block

1.2 Accessories Supplied

The transmitter includes the following accessories:

Software (preconfigured)
R&S SU800 exciter (customized)
R&S NetCCU800 (customized)

3562.0908.72 - 3.5 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

2 Overview

The basic procedure for installing the transmitter is as follows:

Set up transmitter
Erect transmitter rack
Align transmitter rack
Remove cover panels
Unpack components
Ventilation system
Remove transport lock on fan
Connect air intake/exhaust ducts
Connect external fan (depending on ventilation system)
AC Power Supply
Connect transmitter ground
Connect main switch
Connect external devices (optional)
Install R&S NetCCU800
Install exciter
Install amplifier
Install absorber block
Antenna
Connect antenna
Connect monitoring modules of external combining filters or dummy antennas
Connect dummy antenna
Connection panel
Install modulation input cables
Install parallel remote control interface cables (optional)

Detailed information on the installation procedure for the transmitter is provided in the fol-
lowing sections.

3562.0908.72 - 3.6 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

3 Setting Up Transmitter

Make sure that the transmitter is standing in a stable position and that ventilation is suffi-
cient.

Note During installation, the transmitter must be easily accessible from the front and rear. A
clearance space of at least 1.2 m is necessary in order to install all components.

3.1 Erecting Transmitter Rack

The transmitter rack can be set up using lift equipment (crane). Lifting eyes are attached to
the top of the rack for this purpose.

ATTENTION!
Do not stand under suspended racks. Risk of crushing.
Take the relevant safety precautions when climbing ladders. Risk of falling.
Do not tilt the transmitter rack by more than 15. It could otherwise tip over.

3.2 Aligning Transmitter Rack

The transmitter rack must be aligned vertically in order to prevent distortion caused by
shearing forces. Use a spirit level to align the rack.

3.3 Removing Cover Panels

Before you start installing the individual pieces of equipment, make sure that you have easy
access to all equipment, connectors and interfaces needed.

) Using a Torx screwdriver, remove all cover panels from the front and rear of the rack and,
if necessary, the side panels. This allows you to reach all equipment, connectors and
interfaces necessary.

Note Take care not to damage the ground connections when detaching and attaching the cover
panels.

3562.0908.72 - 3.7 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

Fig. 1 Ground connection on cover panel

3.4 Unpacking Components

Each transmitter component is packaged separately.

) Remove the packaging and have all equipment ready to hand.

3562.0908.72 - 3.8 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

4 Ventilation System

The ventilation system is already installed and wired inside the transmitter. To ensure that
it functions correctly, you must connect it to the stationary ventilation system.

Note The transport lock must be removed from the fan before the ventilation system is put into
operation.

4.1 Connecting Intake/Exhaust Air Ducts

Depending on the order specifications, the intake air/exhaust air connections are located
on the top and/or bottom or rear panel (intake from surrounding air) of the rack. They have
to be connected to the ventilation system of the station. Precise instructions concerning this
topic can be found in the documentation supplied with the ventilation system.

ATTENTION!
The intake air must be filtered to prevent contamination and its temperature must be no
less than 10C in order to prevent condensation.

Note Connect the intake air/exhaust air lines correctly as external disturbances in the air supply
are not directly detected by the system. Filters, pipes and appropriate accessories for the
air intake/exhaust system are available as special accessories.

4.1.1 Technical Specifications


When connecting the air intake/exhaust system, it is important to take the pressure losses
produced in the system into consideration. The tables below show which components
cause which pressure losses (unit: Pascal) in the air intake/exhaust system. The values list-
ed in the tables are maximum values.

Note The tables only apply to original transmitter accessory parts. The installation of an auxiliary
fan is not taken into consideration in the tables below.

The sum total of the pressure losses produced in each air intake and air exhaust system
must not exceed the pressure drop specified for a transmitter type (see Chapter 2.2, Design
and Function) for the air intake/exhaust system.

Intake pressure losses for transmitters with built-in fan

R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S


NR8202 NR8205 NR8207 NR8210 NR8212 NR8215

Intake air flow rate at 5 15 19.2 24.2 29.2 29.2


1000 hPa m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min

Min. diameter of 160 mm 180 mm 200 mm 200 mm 250 mm 250 mm


intake air pipe

3562.0908.72 - 3.9 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S


NR8202 NR8205 NR8207 NR8210 NR8212 NR8215

Pressure loss per 2 Pa/m 5 Pa/m 6 Pa/m 9 Pa/m 4 Pa/m 4 Pa/m


meter of piping

Pressure loss per 90 10 Pa 16 Pa 20 Pa 26 Pa 14 Pa 14 Pa


elbow

Pressure loss from 2 Pa 0 Pa 20 Pa 30 Pa 60 Pa 60 Pa


reduction connection
between transmitter /
ventilation system

Pressure loss from 3 Pa 15 Pa 16 Pa 25 Pa 15 Pa 15 Pa


open shut-off valve

Pressure loss from 2 Pa 8 Pa 8 Pa 13 Pa 8 Pa 8 Pa


open multi-leaf
damper

Pressure loss from T- 5 Pa 5 Pa 0 Pa 0 Pa 0 Pa 0 Pa


fitting for mixed air

Pressure loss from 15 Pa 15 Pa 15 Pa 15 Pa 15 Pa 15 Pa


intake lattice at max.
5m/s flow rate

Pressure loss from 30 Pa 30 Pa 30 Pa 30 Pa 30 Pa 30 Pa


backdraught shutter

Intake pressure losses for transmitters with external fan

R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S


NR8202 NR8205 NR8207 NR8210 NR8212 NR8215

Intake air flow rate at 9.4 19.2 25.8 30 35 35


1000 hPa m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min

Min. diameter of 160 mm 180 mm 200 mm 200 mm 250 mm 250 mm


intake air pipe

Pressure loss per 4 Pa/m 9 Pa/m 9 Pa/m 10 Pa/m 5 Pa/m 5 Pa/m


meter of piping

Pressure loss per 90 11 Pa 25 Pa 25 Pa 30 Pa 20 Pa 20 Pa


elbow

Pressure loss from 5 Pa 0 Pa 30 Pa 40 Pa 90 Pa 90 Pa


reduction connection
between transmitter /
ventilation system

Pressure loss from 9 Pa 22 Pa 26 Pa 38 Pa 21 Pa 21 Pa


open shut-off valve

3562.0908.72 - 3.10 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S


NR8202 NR8205 NR8207 NR8210 NR8212 NR8215

Pressure loss from 5 Pa 12 Pa 14 Pa 18 Pa 12 Pa 12 Pa


open multi-leaf
damper

Pressure loss from T- 10 Pa 10 Pa 5 Pa 5 Pa 5 Pa 5 Pa


fitting for mixed air

Pressure loss from 15 Pa 15 Pa 15 Pa 15 Pa 15 Pa 15 Pa


intake lattice at max.
5m/s flow rate

Pressure loss from 30 Pa 30 Pa 30 Pa 36 Pa 30 Pa 30 Pa


backdraught shutter

Exhaust pressure losses

R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S


NR8202 NR8205 NR8207 NR8210 NR8212 NR8215

Exhaust air flow rate 4.2 12.5 16.7 20.8 25 25


at 1000 hPa m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min m3/min

Min. diameter of 160 mm 180 mm 200 mm 200 mm 250 mm 250 mm


exhaust air pipe

Pressure loss per 1 Pa/m 4 Pa/m 4 Pa/m 8 Pa/m 3 Pa/m 3 Pa/m


meter of piping

Pressure loss per 90 3 Pa 12 Pa 14 Pa 20 Pa 12 Pa 12 Pa


elbow

Pressure loss from 2 Pa 0 Pa 12 Pa 15 Pa 60 Pa 60 Pa


reduction connection
between transmitter /
ventilation system

Pressure loss from 2 Pa 10 Pa 12 Pa 8 Pa 11 Pa 11 Pa


open shut-off valve

Pressure loss from 1 Pa 6 Pa 7 Pa 5 Pa 6 Pa 6 Pa


open multi-leaf
damper

Pressure loss from T- 5 Pa 15 Pa 15 Pa 12 Pa 15 Pa 15 Pa


fitting for exhaust air
distribution

Pressure loss from 28 Pa 100 Pa 117 Pa 75 Pa 108 Pa 108 Pa


exhaust lattice

Pressure loss from 30 Pa 30 Pa 30 Pa 30 Pa 30 Pa 30 Pa


backdraught shutter

3562.0908.72 - 3.11 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

4.2 Connecting External Fan

As an alternative to the built-in fan, it is also possible to connect an external fan (depending
on the ventilation system used). Slot X31 on the power distribution board is intended for
connection of an external fan. It is protected by the automatic line fuse F6 (fan control).

ATTENTION!
The motor protection switch Q8 must be matched to the fan output.

Fig. 2 Male connector for connecting an external fan

4.3 Checking Ventilation Cover Panels

To ensure that ventilation functions properly inside the transmitter, the interior part of the
transmitter rack has an opening on each side to permit air circulation.

) Make sure that the openings on both sides of the amplifiers to be installed are free (if
they are not, remove the cover plates).

3562.0908.72 - 3.12 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

Fig. 3 Ventilation openings

1) Open ventilation opening


2) Covered ventilation opening

4.4 Checking Differential Pressure Gages

For the differential pressure gages to be able to measure the pressure between the fans
and the surrounding atmosphere, the protective caps must be removed from the air noz-
zles.

) Make sure that the protective caps of the differential pressure gage have already been
removed (if not, remove them).

3562.0908.72 - 3.13 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

5 AC Power Supply

The R&S NR8000 transmitter is not a socket-type transmitter. Its standard components are
all permanently interconnected by means of cables. Thus the rack simply needs to be con-
nected to an AC power supply.

ATTENTION!
Before you connect the transmitter, disconnect the power supply cable from the supply.

Requirements

AC supply input voltage range: 320 V to 477 V (380 V, 400 V and 420 V)
AC supply frequency: 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Starting current: < 32 A per amplifier module

The table below specifies the cable cross-sections and backup fuses for various transmitter
types:

R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S R&S


Transmitter type
NR8002 NR8005 NR8007 NR8010 NR8012 NR8215

Number of racks 1 1 1 1 1 1

RF power [kW] 2,5 5 7,5 10 12,5 15

Power consumption [W] 5550 9840 14530 18820 23800 28100


with fan type *) D064 D064 D066 D066 D07 D07

Phase current [A]

400 V AC supply [A] 8.0 15.0 22.0 29.0 36.0 47.7


(European standard)

Wire cross-section [mm] 1.6 2.5 4 10 10 16

Backup fuse [A] 16 16 25 50 50 63

230 V AC supply [A] 13.9 26.1 38.2 50.3 62.4 83


(Scandinavia)

Wire cross-section [mm] 2.5 4 6 10 16 25

Backup fuse [A] 16 32 50 63 80 100

208 V AC supply [A] 15.4 28.8 42.2 55.6 69.1 91.8


(USA)

Wire cross-section [mm] 2.5 4 10 10 16 25

Backup fuse [A] 25 32 63 63 80 100

*) The power consumption values for the respective fan types are specified in Chap. 2.3.

3562.0908.72 - 3.14 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

ATTENTION!
Make sure that the AC supply voltage is within the specified range and check all power
cables for possible damage.

5.1 Connecting Transmitter Ground

ATTENTION!
The rack must be connected to the station's main ground terminal.

A grounding bolt is fitted in the transmitter rack (it is easily accessible from the front of the
unit).

) Secure the external ground conductor to the ground bolt with the aid of the nut.

Fig. 4 Ground connection on transmitter rack

5.2 Connecting Main Switch

The external AC power supply is connected directly to the main switch. The main switch
completely isolates the rack from the AC supply. Use a 5 core cable (3 phases, neutral and
protective lead).

1. Unscrew the rotary knob and the main switch cover.

3562.0908.72 - 3.15 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

Fig. 5 Unscrewing the rotary knob and the cover

2. Secure the supplied strain relief for the AC supply cable in place as shown.

Fig. 6 Strain relief for AC supply cable

3. Loosen the screws on the switch housing so that you can easily insert the cables.
4. Insert the cables into the corresponding openings and fasten them with the screws.
Note Notice how the cables are labeled and make sure they are in the right sequence, since
two of the three phase cables are the same color (black).

5. Measure the direction of current flow using a rotary field meter.


If the direction of current flow is correct, continue to the next step. If the direction of cur-
rent flow is not correct, reverse two wires and measure the direction of current flow
again.

6. Screw the main switch cover and the rotary knob back on.

3562.0908.72 - 3.16 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

Fig. 7 Main switch locked

Note The rotating field direction of the AC supply voltage is only relevant if three-phase fans are
used. All other transmitter modules function irrespective of the rotating field direction.

5.3 Connecting External Units

You can connect the following equipment to the transmitter's power distribution board:

Single phase auxiliary fan or control connector: F7 3A fuse - X32 male connector
Three phase auxiliary fan: External three phase protection for auxiliary fan (F8 3A fuse)
- X33 male connector
Switched via K2 (cooling ON/OFF)
External three-phase contactor for dummy antenna fan (fuse F8 3A) - X33 male connec-
tor
Switched via K3 (dummy load cooling ON/OFF)
Socket - X57 male connector
Add-on unit for installation in transmitter (F4 3A fuse) - X52 male connector
Single phase socket with ground contact (instrument socket preinstalled) such as RDS
coder

The appropriate unequipped plugs are already installed at the proper positions.

1. Remove the required unequipped plug from the power distribution board.
2. Connect the cables of the external equipment to the male connector. Use a suitable
screwdriver to open the appropriate terminal.
3. Reinsert the connector into the power distribution board.

3562.0908.72 - 3.17 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

Fig. 8 Power distribution board with unused connectors

3562.0908.72 - 3.18 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

6 R&S NetCCU800 and Exciter

The R&S NetCCU800 and exciter are installed together in a rackmount at the top of the
transmitter rack.

6.1 Preparing Instruments and Transmitter Rack

1. Carefully remove the R&S NetCCU800 and exciter from their packaging.
2. Remove the cover panels at the installation location (2 x 2 HU above the position of the
rack controller).

or
Remove the stops for the telescopic rails by undoing the captive screws.

6.2 Installing Instruments

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any installa-
tion work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid
damage to the instruments.

Fig. 9 R&S NetCCU800 and two exciters in rackmount

3562.0908.72 - 3.19 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

1) Captive screws at front of instruments


2) Screws securing R&S NetCCU800 and exciters to rackmount
3) Telescopic rails
4) Support bracket for the R&S NetCCU800
5) Support bracket for first exciter
6) Support bracket for second exciter (with exciter standby)
7) Safety lever for locking/unlocking guide rail latch

1. Pull out the telescopic rails as far as they will go.


The guide rails will lock in place; they are fully secured.

2. Slide the R&S NetCCU800 horizontally into the rackmount on the (lowest) support
brackets until the screw holes in the rackmount and on the side panels of the R&S
NetCCU800 line up.
3. Using the supplied screws, fasten the R&S NetCCU800 with two screws on each side.
4. Slide the exciter into the rackmount horizontally on the (middle) support brackets until
the screw holes in the rackmount and on the side panels of the exciter line up.
5. Using the supplied screws, fasten the exciter with two screws on each side.
To install a second exciter (with exciter standby), place the exciter on the (top) support
bracket and repeat steps 3 to 5 accordingly.

6. Connect all cables to the R&S NetCCU800 and exciter, referring to the cable labeling
and the connection diagram as you do so (see Appendix).
7. Undo the latch of the guide rails by pushing down the safety lever on the right side while
simultaneously pushing up the safety lever on the left side (hold the levers in position).
8. Slide the rackmount into the rack and secure the complete rackmount to the rack using
the captive screws (to the right and left of the handles).
9. Close the 1 HU opening above the exciter using the appropriate cover panel (unneces-
sary if a second exciter is installed in the rackmount).

3562.0908.72 - 3.20 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

7 Absorber Block

For shipping reasons, the absorber block is supplied as a separate package and must
therefore be retrofitted in the transmitter.

7.1 Absorber for 5 kW to 12.5 kW Transmitters

The installation location of the absorber block depends on the transmitter power (number
of amplifiers):

With 5 kW transmitters - directly under the two amplifiers


With 7.5 kW to 12.5 kW transmitter - at the bottom installation position directly above the
power distribution

The units are installed without cables needing to be connected because the male connec-
tors on the absorber engage automatically in the female connectors of the combiner.

7.1.1 Preparing Instrument and Transmitter Rack


1. Carefully remove the absorber block from its packaging.
2. Remove the cover panel (if fitted) at the installation position (below the bottom amplifier;
3 HU) by undoing the captive screws.
3. Check whether the ventilation cover plates inside the rack (left and right) have been re-
moved. Remove them if necessary.

7.1.2 Installing Absorber Block

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any installa-
tion work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid
damage to the instruments.

ATTENTION!
Always use two people to install the absorber block, as the unit weighs some 20 kg.

1. Select the installation position provided for the absorber block in the transmitter rack (be-
tween the power distribution and the amplifiers).
2. Place the absorber block on the guide rails and slide it carefully into the rack as far as it
will go.
The absorber is guided onto the connections by means of guide pins on the rear panel.

3562.0908.72 - 3.21 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

3. Using two screws, fasten the absorber block to the rack from the rear.
These screws are secured underneath the combiner and attach the absorber block to
the rear panel of the ventilation box.

Fig. 10 Installation of absorber

7.2 Absorber for 15 kW Transmitters

The installation position for the two absorber blocks of 7.5 kW each is located at the rear of
the transmitter. After installation, the absorber must be cabled.

7.2.1 Installing Absorber Blocks

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any installa-
tion work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid
damage to the instruments.

ATTENTION!
Always use two people to install the absorber blocks, as the unit weighs some 20 kg.

1. Carefully remove the two absorber blocks from their packaging.


2. Insert the first absorber block (connectors toward the bottom) into the absorber bracket
and slide it carefully toward the rear.

3562.0908.72 - 3.22 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

3. Insert the two distance U pieces into the absorber bracket from below and screw them
from above using a Torx screwdriver.

4. Insert the second absorber block (connectors toward the bottom) into the absorber
bracket and slide it carefully toward the rear.
5. Secure the two metal braces that hold the second absorber block in place by using two
Torx screws each (3 x 8).

3562.0908.72 - 3.23 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

6. In any sequence fasten the six RF cables soldered to the coupler to inputs X11 - X16 of
the absorber blocks (1) and carefully tighten the union nuts with an M32 open-end
wrench.
7. Connect the two absorber monitoring cables W53E to the X11 connectors of the absorb-
er blocks (2).
8. Connect the two control cables for switching the absorber fan on/off (3).

1) RF cable to coupler
2) Absorber monitoring cable
3) Control cable for switching the absorber fan on/off

3562.0908.72 - 3.24 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

8 Amplifiers

Like the absorber block, the amplifiers must also be mounted in the rack during installation.
The number of amplifiers depends on the transmitter power and must correspond to the in-
stalled combiner.

8.1 Installing Amplifiers

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any installa-
tion work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid
damage to the instruments.

ATTENTION!
Always have a second person assist you in installing the amplifiers as the instruments are
very heavy (approx. 29 kg).

Note Before you install the amplifiers, make sure that the ventilation cover panels inside the rack
have been removed.

Install the amplifiers in the sequence top to bottom.

1. Carefully remove the amplifier from its packaging.


2. Select the installation position provided for the amplifier in the transmitter rack.
3. Place the amplifier on the guide rails and slide it carefully into the rack as far as it will go.
The amplifier is guided onto the connections by means of guide pins on the rear panel.

4. Fasten the amplifier to the rack using the four screws on the two front brackets.
5. To install additional amplifiers, repeat steps 1 to 4.

Fig. 11 Installing the amplifier

3562.0908.72 - 3.25 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

9 Antenna

The connection flanges for the antenna cables are all 1 5/8 EIA for 5W to 12.5kW FM trans-
mitters and are located on top of the transmitter.

9.1 Connecting Antenna

Connect the antenna as follows:

) Using the 4 screws (M8, 35mm), secure the preassembled coaxial cable required for
connecting the antenna. To prevent the screw connection from loosening, insert a plain
washer and a spring-lock washer.

Note In regions with high humidity, the supplied rubber ring can be inserted into the groove be-
tween the two EIA flanges (on the nut side).

Fig. 12 RF connector with coupling

9.2 Connecting Dummy Antenna

Connect the dummy antenna only for maintenance and repair purposes.

With some dummy antennas that have coolant monitoring and overtemperature monitoring,
the monitoring equipment can be connected to the transmitter. The main protection loop
(X41.1 and X41.2 in the power distribution) can be used here as a temporary measure (e.g.
while the unit is being put into operation).

3562.0908.72 - 3.26 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

) Remove the jumper and connect the monitoring unit.

If you are using an RF patch panel that allows you to switch between the antenna and dum-
my antenna by means of an RF bridge (permanent installation), you should connect the
dummy antenna monitoring unit to the standby protection loop (X41.3 and X41.4 in the pow-
er distribution). For this to be done, the messages of the patch panel must also be sent to
the controller.

3562.0908.72 - 3.27 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

10 Connection Panel

The terminal board is on the transmitter top and consists of the following components:

Modulation input
Parallel remote control interface (optional; illustration shows two possible installation po-
sitions)

Fig. 13 Connection panel

10.1 Installing Modulation Input Cables

The modulation input is used to connect audio signals which are forwarded to the exciter.

Fig. 14 Modulation input

Various modulation signals (lines) and add-on equipment can be connected to the modula-
tion input sockets. The connections are wired.

3562.0908.72 - 3.28 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

The following functions are executed by making settings at the R&S NetCCU800 using the
software:

Activation of the respective port


Level matching (gain matching)
Line impedance (adjusted partly by software and partly by jumpers)

Inputs AUX1 to AUX3 are fully equivalent from the electrical point of view.

The sockets of the modulation input module can be switched as follows:

Pin assignment
Socket Type Level Remarks
for impedances

LINKS/MPX XLR Audio level Pin 2 = Audio In+ Switchable between


(LEFT/MPX) 3- -6 to +12 dBu Pin 3 = Audio In - audio and MPX using
con- Pin 1 = GND software
Balanced or tact MPX level:
unbalanced -1 to +16 dBu Impedance config-
Zin = 600 urable in the modula-
or > 2 k tion input module and
exciter module
(default > 2 k)

RECHTS XLR Audio level: Pin 2 = Audio In+ Switchable between


(RIGHT) 3- -6 to +12 dBu Pin 3 = Audio In - audio and MPX using
con- Zin = 600 or > 2 Pin 1 = GND software
Balanced or tact k
unbalanced Impedance config-
urable in the modula-
tion input module and
exciter module
(default > 2 k)

DIGITAL AUDIO XLR AES/EBU level: Pin 2 = Audio In+ Feed


or MPX 3- 200 mVpp - 10Vpp Pin 3 = Audio In - - AES / EBU
con- Zi = 110 bal- Pin 1 = GND or
tact anced - MPX
possible
MPX level
-1 to +16 dBu Switchover using soft-
Zin 600 ware
/ >2 k
balanced or unbal-
anced

RDS BNC -18 to -7 dBu Inner conductor Activate using soft-


AUX1 (SCA1) for nominal devia- against GND ware and adjust level.
tion (unbalanced)
typ. 4 kHz Zin >2 k

PILOT BNC 19 kHz Inner conductor Switchable using soft-


1V squarewave against GND ware
1:1 (unbalanced)

3562.0908.72 - 3.29 - EN-5


Chapter 3 Installation

Pin assignment
Socket Type Level Remarks
for impedances

AUX2 (SCA2) BNC -14 to +2 dBu Inner conductor Activate using soft-
for nominal devia- against GND ware and adjust level.
tion (unbalanced)
typ. 4 kHz Zin >2 k

AUX3 (SCA3) BNC -14 to +2 dBu Inner conductor Activate using soft-
for nominal devia- against GND ware and adjust level.
tion (unbalanced)
typ. 4 kHz Zin >2 k

10.2 Installing Parallel Remote-Control Interface Cables


(Optional)

The parallel remote-control interface is used to operate the transmitter from a remote loca-
tion via parallel wire connections (not a computer interface). You can use a remote control
location to issue commands (ON, OFF, MONO, STEREO etc.) or to receive messages from
the transmitter, for instance concerning its state (TRANSMITTER IS ON, TRANSMITTER
IS IN MONO, TRANSMITTER IS ON FREQUENCY).

Fig. 15 Parallel remote control interface

Note A cross-reference table for assigning commands and messages to the 32 command lines
and 80 signal lines together with the corresponding connector pin assignment is included
in the transmitter documentation on a project-by-project basis (routing table).

3562.0908.72 - 3.30 - EN-5


Broadcasting Division

CHAPTER 4

PUTTING INTO OPERATION

Printed in Germany

3562.0908.72 - 4.1 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

CONTENTS

1 General Information ......................................................................... 5


1.1 Preparations ....................................................................................................5
1.2 Requirements ..................................................................................................5
1.3 Operating R&S NetCCU800 ...........................................................................6

2 Putting a Transmitter into Operation ............................................. 7


2.1 Preparations ....................................................................................................7
2.1.1 Switching On R&S NetCCU800 ...................................................................7
2.1.2 Preparing for Local Operation ......................................................................7
2.1.3 Changing User Type ....................................................................................7
2.1.4 Setting Transmitter Type ..............................................................................8
2.1.4.1 Setting Variant and Tx Mode ............................................................................. 8
2.1.4.2 Setting TxMode and TxType .............................................................................. 9
2.1.5 Configuring Output Stage ...........................................................................10
2.1.6 Scanning Rack(s) .......................................................................................10
2.2 Entering Basic Settings ...............................................................................12
2.2.1 R&S NetCCU800 Setup .............................................................................12
2.2.1.1 Common ........................................................................................................... 12
2.2.1.2 System ............................................................................................................. 13
2.2.1.3 SW Maintenance .............................................................................................. 13
2.2.1.4 Network ............................................................................................................ 14
2.2.1.5 SNMP ............................................................................................................... 17
2.2.1.6 RS232 .............................................................................................................. 20
2.2.1.7 NTP .................................................................................................................. 20
2.2.2 Exciter Setup ..............................................................................................21
2.2.2.1 Ethernet ............................................................................................................ 21
2.2.2.2 Date / Time ....................................................................................................... 22
2.2.2.3 Setting Transmission Frequency ...................................................................... 23
2.3 Setting Output Power ...................................................................................24
2.4 Calibrating Measurement Systems of Transmitter ....................................24
2.4.1 Calibrating RF Probes ................................................................................24
2.4.2 Calibrating Forward-Power Test Point .......................................................25
2.4.3 Calibrating Reflected-Power Test Point .....................................................26
2.5 Automatic Switchover ..................................................................................27
2.6 Entering Exciter Settings .............................................................................29
2.6.1 Selecting Modulation Type and Active Channel .........................................29
2.6.2 Setting Pilot Tone and Pre-emphasis .........................................................31

3562.0908.72 - 4.3 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

2.6.3 Setting Nominal Deviation and Configuring Limiter ....................................32


2.6.4 Setting Audio and Data Inputs ....................................................................34
2.6.4.1 Setting Analog Inputs and MPX Input .............................................................. 34
2.6.4.2 Setting Digital Input (AES/EBU) ....................................................................... 35
2.6.4.3 Setting Data Inputs AUX1 to AUX3 (incl. RDS) ................................................ 36
2.7 Parameter Sets .............................................................................................37

3 Completion of Procedure for Putting Transmitter into Operation


.......................................................................................................... 39
3.1 Final Steps ....................................................................................................39
3.1.1 Checking Output Stage Status Display ......................................................39
3.1.2 Checking Exciter Status Display ................................................................40
3.1.3 Checking R&S NetCCU800 Status Display ................................................40
3.2 Clearing Event Memories .............................................................................41

3562.0908.72 - 4.4 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

1 General Information

Transmitters are put into operation via the graphical interface on the R&S NetCCU800.

1.1 Preparations

Before you can put a transmitter into operation, it must first have been fully installed. Check
the following list to ensure that all connections have been correctly made:

) Check whether all the modules delivered have been correctly installed and connected
as necessary.

) Check whether the transmitter has been correctly connected to the AC supply. Please
note:

Connection in general
Power feed, rack ground, air cooling system, 50 test load (dummy antenna) in ap-
propriate cases, power-handling capacity P > nominal transmitter power, directional-
coupler filter, matrix or antenna
Connections for interlock circuits
Set up the following jumpers/connections on the power distribution PCB connectors.
(The name of the connector concerned is printed on the PCB.)
Interlock circuit for exciter RF blanking - X41 1-2Interlock circuit for standby exciter
(optional) - X41 3-4
Emergency-off switch X7 (if available)
Setting the motor protection switches
Protection for external fans as appropriate to the fans used (project-dependent)
Connection of air pressure connectors

) Check the direction of the rotary field from the AC supply voltage.

) Switch off all motor protection switches.

) Check that all screws and nuts are securely fastened, especially those on the transmitter
RF output.

1.2 Requirements

1. Before switching on the transmitter, check whether the exciter is set to the correct fre-
quency (consistent with any diplexer or bandpass filter that may be connected).
If the transmission frequency is not yet known, the exciter should remain switched off
until the frequency is set via the R&S NetCCU800.

3562.0908.72 - 4.5 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

2. Connect an antenna to the RF output.

Switching on the transmitter

Switch on the transmitter as follows:

1. Switch on the fan fuse for the fan.


2. Turn on the main disconnect switch Q1.
3. Switch on the fuse for the Aux.Power Supply.
4. Switch on the R&S NetCCU800 via the automatic line fuse F1.
The R&S NetCCU800 boots up.

5. Switch on the exciter (A/B).


The exciter should boot up.

6. If necessary switch on Additional and Peripheral Units.

1.3 Operating R&S NetCCU800

Note Detailed information on operating the R&S NetCCU800 can be found in the "Operation"
section.

3562.0908.72 - 4.6 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

2 Putting a Transmitter into Operation

Local operation of the R&S NetCCU800 includes all the information calls for the system pa-
rameters and their settings, complete with intuitive graphical menus.

Remote operation via a web browser is possible only if a PC or notebook is connected to


the front or rear panel of the R&S NetCCU800.

2.1 Preparations

2.1.1 Switching On R&S NetCCU800


) Connect the R&S NetCCU800 to the AC power supply.
After a few seconds, the unit boots up and the entry screen indicates when it is ready for
use.

2.1.2 Preparing for Local Operation


To prepare for local operation, proceed as follows:

) Press the LOCAL key on the R&S NetCCU800.


Its yellow LED should light up.

2.1.3 Changing User Type


To configure the transmitter by means of the R&S NetCCU800, you must have "Configura-
tion" rights.

To log on, proceed as follows:

3562.0908.72 - 4.7 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

1. From the context menu, select the menu item Change User. When in local operation
mode, you do not need to enter a password to change the user ID.
The Logon window opens.

2. Select the user type Configuration by clicking Select user from list.
Note The fields Or type user name and Type password are reserved for R&S Service per-
sonnel only.

2.1.4 Setting Transmitter Type


The menu structure of the R&S NetCCU800 depends on the set variant, the TxMode and
the TxType of the transmitter.

2.1.4.1 Setting Variant and Tx Mode

1. Select NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > System.


The System window opens.

3562.0908.72 - 4.8 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

2. Select Tx NetCCU NX under the menu item Variant.


3. Select FM under the menu item TxMode.
4. Close the window.

You must reboot the R&S NetCCU800 so that your entries become active.

) To do so, open the context menu (Menu key) in the NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup
> SW Maintenance menu and select the menu item Reboot.

2.1.4.2 Setting TxMode and TxType

1. Select NetCCU > Setup > Tx Setup.


The Tx Setup window opens.

2. Select FM under the menu item Tx Mode.


3. Then select the required entry (SingleTx or DualDrive) under the menu item Tx Type.
4. Close the window.

You must reboot the R&S NetCCU800 so that your entries become active.

) To do so, open the context menu (Menu key) in the NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup
> SW Maintenance menu and select the menu item Reboot.

3562.0908.72 - 4.9 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

2.1.5 Configuring Output Stage


) Select Outputstage A > Setup > OS Setup.
The OS Setup window opens.

You can make the following settings in the OS Setup window:

Setting item Typical Explanation

Racks per OS 1 Number of transmitter racks


Values: 1 - 10 (for FM - maximum 4)

Max. Outlet Temp. 65 C max. Maximum exhaust air temperature of transmitter


FM transmitter:
Toutmax = 65 C

Amplifier per Rack Number of amplifiers

RF Probes are at 1 In the APA configuration, the transmitter has additional


Rack test points for the output stages. Under this configuration
item you can specify the rack in which the test points are
installed (typ. rack 1).

) Close the window.

You must reboot the R&S NetCCU800 so that your entries become active.

) To do so, open the context menu (Menu key) in the menu NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU
Setup > SW Maintenance and activate the menu item Reboot.

2.1.6 Scanning Rack(s)


1. Switch all amplifiers (in all racks) to OFF by operating the associated fuses.
Note Wait until the link LEDs on the amplifiers stop flashing.

3562.0908.72 - 4.10 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

2. Select Outputstage A > Setup > OS Setup.


The OS Setup window opens.

3. Open the context menu.

4. Select the menu item Rescan Racks.


The link tables of the individual rack controllers used for amplifier assignment are delet-
ed. At the same time, the link table used for rack assignment is prepared for deletion.

5. Switch on the first amplifier in each rack.


The amplifier is detected automatically by the respective rack controller and is assigned
the next free CAN ID (starting with 1).

6. Wait until the link LED(s) on the switched-on amplifiers remain(s) lit.
7. Repeat this procedure with the second, third, etc amplifier of each rack.
8. Switch off the operating voltage of the rack controllers by switching off the fuses for ex-
citer A, exciter B (if available) and for the 12 V auxiliary voltage.
9. Boot the R&S NetCCU800.
10.Switch on the operating voltage of the first rack.
The rack is detected automatically by the R&S NetCCU800 and is assigned the next free
CAN ID (starting with 1).

11. Wait until the link LEDs of the rack remain lit.
12.Now repeat this procedure with the second, third, etc rack.

You must reboot the R&S NetCCU800 so that your entries become active.

) To do so, open the context menu (MENU key) in the NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup
> SW Maintenance menu and select the menu item Reboot.

3562.0908.72 - 4.11 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

2.2 Entering Basic Settings

2.2.1 R&S NetCCU800 Setup

2.2.1.1 Common

You can use the R&S NetCCU800 to enter the basic system settings.

) Select NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > Common.


The Common window opens.

You can make the following settings in the Common window:

Selection Explanation

Date Current date

Time Local time

Display Timeout Time in minutes after which the display switches off (standby)

LED Local Color of the Local LED on the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800 (yel-
low, green)

LED On Color of the ON LED on the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800 (yellow,
green)

Fan Control Used to switch fan monitoring ON/OFF; the fan monitoring function must
be switched off on instruments without fans; rebooting is necessary after
this function has been switched ON/OFF.

3562.0908.72 - 4.12 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

2.2.1.2 System

) Select NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > System.


The System window opens.

You can make the following settings in the System window:

Selection Explanation

Variant Use of the R&S NetCCU800 as a NetCCU (transmitter control unit) or as


an NSU (control unit for n+1 systems)

Number of Tx Number of transmitters to be controlled (only relevant if the R&S


NetCCU800 is used as an NSU)

Tx Mode Used to select the TV/sound broadcasting standard

RS232 Application Used to define the RS-232-C interface

BitBus Slave TCP Used to define the used TCP port (only for RS232 Application = BitBus
Port Slave)

BitBus Slave CRC Used to define whether CRC is used (only for RS232 Application = Bit-
Bus Slave)

Parallel IO Used to activate/deactivate the parallel remote-control interface

Inhibit Status Used to switch the message inhibit function ON/OFF

2.2.1.3 SW Maintenance

) Select NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > SW Maintenance.


The SW Maintenance window opens.

3562.0908.72 - 4.13 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

You can make the following settings in the SW Maintenance window:

Function Explanation

Update Exc A Displays the progress of software update installation for exciter A

Update Exc B Displays the progress of software update installation for exciter B

Reboot The operating system and all applications are restarted.


(context menu)

Restart All applications are restarted; the operating system remains active. Usu-
(context menu) ally, only a restart is required following a software update.

Start NetCCU Update The software updates available for the transmitter system are trans-
(context menu) ferred to the R&S NetCCU800. The new software is then installed auto-
matically on the R&S NetCCU800.

Start Exciter A The software update available on the R&S NetCCU800 is transferred to
Update (context exciter A and then installed automatically.
menu)

Start Exciter B The software update available on the R&S NetCCU800 is transferred to
Update (context exciter B and then installed automatically.
menu)

2.2.1.4 Network

In the menu windows of the Network menu, you can make the settings required when con-
necting the R&S NetCCU800 to a PC/laptop or LAN/WLAN.

The network settings for the front Ethernet interface are preset. You can configure the set-
tings for the rear interface manually or have them assigned automatically by a DHCP server
in the network.

Checking network settings for front interface

) Select NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > Network > Front Ethernet.
The Front Ethernet window opens.

3562.0908.72 - 4.14 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

You can check the following settings in the Front Ethernet window:

Display Explanation

IP Address IP address of the network card

Network Mask Subnet mask of the network card

Speed Mode Speed and duplex

Factory setting: 10 Mbit / Half Duplex

Autosensing Autonegotiation ON/OFF

Factory setting: On

Autonegotiation = Automatic determination of the settings for the net-


work card

MAC Address Unique ID of the network card

Notes

All settings for the front Ethernet interface are preset. If a PC/laptop is to be connected, the
network interface on the PC/laptop must be configured accordingly:

IP address (PC): First three segments same as those for IP Address of the R&S
NetCCU800 (see above); a value below 250 must be entered for the last segment
Subnet mask (PC): Same settings as under Network Mask (see above)

Configuring rear Ethernet interface

) Select NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > Network > Rear Ethernet.
The Rear Ethernet window opens.

3562.0908.72 - 4.15 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

You can make the following settings in the RearEthernet window:

Setting/display Explanation

IP Address IP address of the network card

Network Mask Subnet mask of the network card

Gateway Gateway address (specified by the network administrator)

DHCP Client Switch used to activate/deactivate the DHCP client:

On: The network settings for IP address, subnet mask and gateway
are retrieved automatically by a DHCP server
Off: The network settings for IP address, subnet mask and gateway
must be entered manually (see above)

Speed Mode a) Speed and duplex

Factory setting: 100 Mbit / Full Duplex

Autosensing a) Autonegotiation ON/OFF

Factory setting: On

Autonegotiation = Automatic determination of the settings for the net-


work card

MAC Address Unique ID of the network card

a) Caution: Only change the settings for Speed Mode and Autosensing in exceptional cases where there are
problems with the network connection.

Notes

Manual settings for remote connection should only be entered in offline mode (context
menu: Edit Offline) and then activated with Submit Changes (context menu).
The IP address must not be in the same network as the front ETHERNET interface.
To allow automatic integration in a network (DHCP Client activated), the network must
contain a DHCP server.

3562.0908.72 - 4.16 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

2.2.1.5 SNMP

In the menu windows of the SNMP menu, you can configure the SNMP connection.

Used to set the UDP port for SET/GET and to activate message suppression for local
operation mode

) Select NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > Services > SNMP > General.
The SNMP > General window opens.

You can make the following settings in the SNMP > General window:

Function Explanation

Port SET/GET UDP port for SNMP SET/GET

Default setting: 161

Inhibit Status Switch for message suppression in Local mode

Off: Traps (alarm messages) are sent in both operating modes


(Remote and Local)
On: No traps are sent in Local mode but the alarms are stored; excep-
tion: trap for Local Mode

Default setting: Off

If OIDs are polled with message suppression active, the return value is 0
(undefined). In this operating state, SNMP commands (SET) are not
executed but simply confirmed.

When the Remote mode is reactivated, all stored alarms are sent once.
The polling of OIDs again returns current values.

Max. not transmitted Number of alarms to be stored if message suppression is active

Default setting: 255

3562.0908.72 - 4.17 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

Setting access protection for communities

) Select NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > Services > SNMP > Manager.
The SNMP > Manager window opens.

You can make the following settings in the SNMP > Manager window:

Function Explanation

Access Level [1 5] Used to select access authorization for one of five user groups

Read Only: For GET (only read access to the agent)


Read / Write: For SET (read and write access to the agent)

Community [1 5] Used to set the SNMP community string (a type of password) for a user
group

Default setting: "public" for read only (GET) and "broadcast" for read /
write (SET)

Case-sensitive!

Enable Used to activate (On) or deactivate (Off) a community

The Off setting is used for configuration purposes and for testing.

Configuring alarm sinks

) Select NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > Services > SNMP > Alarmsinks.
The SNMP > Alarmsinks window opens.

3562.0908.72 - 4.18 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

You can make the following settings in the SNMP > Alarmsinks window:

Function Explanation

Alarmsink Used to select one of 5 alarm sinks for configuration

Enable Used to activate (On) or deactivate (Off) a selected alarm sink

The Off setting is used for configuration purposes and for testing.

IP Address IP address of the alarm sink to which alarms are to be sent

Port UDP port for the SNMP alarms

Default setting: 162

Alarm Version SNMP version in which the alarm is to be sent (v1 Trap, v2c Trap or v2c
Inform)

Traps are sent once only; Informs, however, are repeated several times
until confirmation of the alarm sink is received.

Community Used to select the community (access protection)

The community set here must also be used on the manager side. A dis-
tinction is made between upper-case and lower-case characters.

Communities are configured in the SNMP > Manager menu.

Inform Retry Number of repetitions of an inform (with v2c Inform only)

If after the final repetition of an inform no confirmation of the alarm sink


is received, this alarm is no longer sent.

Inform Timeout Time which is to elapse before an inform is sent again (with v2c Inform
only)

Inform Unackd Number of unconfirmed alarms which can be stored by the agent (with
v2c Inform only)

3562.0908.72 - 4.19 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

2.2.1.6 RS232

In the RS232 menu window you can make settings for the RS-232-C interface.

) Select NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > Services > RS232.
The RS232 window opens.

You can make the following settings in the RS232 menu window.

Function Explanation

Baudrate As required;
if bitbus is used: 19200

Databits Number of data bits of the serial interface (5 to 8)

Stop bits Number of stop bits of the serial interface (1 / 1.5 / 2)

Parity Parity setting

2.2.1.7 NTP

) Select NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > Services > NTP.
The NTP window opens.

3562.0908.72 - 4.20 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

You can make the following settings in the NTP window:

Function Explanation

NTP mode Used to deactivate NTP synchronization (disabled) or to activate NTP


synchronization in step mode; the time is synchronized at the interval
which is set under NTP sync-time (e.g. every 3 minutes)

NTP status Displays the current status (running/stopped)

NTP sync-time Used to set the interval at which the device time (client) is synchronized
with the time of the time server

NTP server config Used to select manual or automatic entry/assignment of the IP address
of the time server; in this software version, only manual entry of the IP
address (under NTP server 1) is supported

NTP server 1 Used to enter the IP address of the time server

2.2.2 Exciter Setup

2.2.2.1 Ethernet

) Select Exciter A/B FM > Setup > Ethernet.


The Ethernet window opens.

3562.0908.72 - 4.21 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

Setting item Description

Front Ethernet Settings for the Ethernet interface on the front panel; this interface
enables the R&S SU800 to be operated with the aid of a web browser,
even without a R&S NetCCU800 .

IP Address IP address (default setting: 192.168.57.253)

Subnet Mask Subnet mask (default setting: 255.255.255.0)

MAC MAC address of the network card

Display Description

Rear Ethernet Indications for the Ethernet interface on the rear panel; the values can-
not be changed, since this interface is reserved for the R&S
NetCCU800.

IP Address IP address
Exciter A: 192.168.058.253 (patch cable)
Exciter A: 192.168.058.252 (crossover cable)

Subnet Mask Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

MAC MAC address of the network card

2.2.2.2 Date / Time

The system time used for logbook entries in the exciter can be set in this menu window. The
time is stored in a realtime clock (RTC) module. The RTC is buffered using a capacitor so
that in the event of a power failure the time remains stored for up to 6 weeks.

Note In the transmitter, all times should be synchronized so that simultaneous events are record-
ed in the logbook with the same system time. For this reason, the time in the exciter is usu-
ally set by the R&S NetCCU800. The settings in the menu window shown below can
therefore not be changed if an R&S NetCCU800 is connected.

3562.0908.72 - 4.22 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

) Select Exciter A/B FM > Setup > Date/Time.


The Date/Time window opens.

You can make the following settings in the Date/Time window:

Setting item Description

Date Current date

Time Current time

2.2.2.3 Setting Transmission Frequency

The transmission frequency is usually set at the manufacturer's factory according to the
customer order. If no customer specifications are available, 97.5 MHz is set.

The customer's forward-power test point at the transmitter output (N socket) is set perma-
nently to an output level of +10 dBm with a nominal power of 97.5 MHz at 50 .

The frequency response is 6 dB/octave.

1. Select Exciter A/B FM > RF.


The RF window opens.

3562.0908.72 - 4.23 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

2. Set the required frequency using the cursor keys and confirm with OK.
The smallest frequency step size is limited to 10 kHz by the software.

3. If the frequency is correctly set, you can switch on the exciter. To do this, press the ON
key on the R&S NetCCU800.

2.3 Setting Output Power

You can set the required output power in the following way:

1. Select Outputstage A > Output Power.


The Output Power window opens.

2. Check the output power using an external measuring instrument and enter a value for
the reference voltage in %.
Note The reference voltage is a DC voltage which is made available to all amplifiers via the rear
ribbon cable. It is used to set the amplifier power.
The test points must have been adjusted properly, otherwise the output power will not be
displayed correctly.

2.4 Calibrating Measurement Systems of Transmitter

Calibration is performed on the manufacturer's premises, but is very easy if a suitable radio
frequency power meter is available.

2.4.1 Calibrating RF Probes


) Select NetCCU > RF Probe Antenna > RF Probe Forward.
The RF Probe Forward window opens.

3562.0908.72 - 4.24 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

You can make the following settings in the RF Probe Forward window:

Function Explanation

Configuration Definitions and settings for the forward-power test point

Label User-defined name for the RF Probe test point

Nominal Value Used to enter the nominal power of the transmitter

Threshold Setting of upper and lower thresholds for forward power; warnings and
fault messages are issued if these thresholds are crossed

RF Fail Limit Used to select a dB value; a fault message is output if the actual value
drops below this limit value

Timeout RF Fail Con- Used to select the time that the actual value must remain below the RF
trol Fail Limit before an appropriate fault message is generated

Warning Limit Used to select a dB value for the forward power; a warning message is
output if the forward power drops below this value

Set Gain (context Used to calibrate the internal measurement system. The internal mea-
menu) surement value for the entered nominal value can be stored by selecting
Set Gain.

Set Offset (context Used to calibrate the zero point as of which the externally measured
menu) power is displayed. The zero point is calibrated by selecting Set Offset.

2.4.2 Calibrating Forward-Power Test Point


The test point has frequency-response compensation.

1. Connect a precise power meter to the output test point.


2. Set the coupling attenuation of the transmitter test point according to the frequency on
the power meter.
3. Select NetCCU > RF Probe Antenna > RF Probe Forward.
4. Open the context menu.

3562.0908.72 - 4.25 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

Zeroing the forward test point

1. Switch the transmitter off (no RF power).


2. Select menu item Set Offset, and press OK.
The internal A/D converters automatically calibrate the offset value for the forward test
point.

Adjusting the final value for the forward test point

1. Switch the transmitter on; power reaches the nominal value.


2. Set the output power on the external measuring instrument exactly to the nominal power
entered.
3. Select the Set Gain menu item.
4. Press OK when the set nominal power matches the power displayed on the external
measuring instrument.
The internal A/D converters automatically calibrate the final value for the forward test
point.

2.4.3 Calibrating Reflected-Power Test Point


The test point has frequency-response compensation.

1. Connect a precise power meter to the output test point.


2. Set the coupling attenuation of the transmitter test point according to the frequency on
the power meter.
3. Select NetCCU > RF Probe Antenna > RF Probe Reflected.
4. Open the context menu.

3562.0908.72 - 4.26 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

Zeroing the reflected test point

1. Switch the transmitter off (no RF power).


2. Select menu item Set Offset, and press OK.
The internal A/D converters automatically calibrate the offset value for the reflected test
point.

Adjusting the final value for the reflected test point

1. Switch the transmitter on; power reaches the nominal value.


2. Select the Set Gain menu item.
3. Press OK when the set nominal power matches the power displayed on the external
measuring instrument.
The internal A/D converters automatically calibrate the final value for the forward test
point.

Note Internally a value of -17 dB is briefly diverted from the forward test point voltage to the
reflected signal detector. This automatically adjusts reflected power, even though no re-
flected power is present on the transmitter output.

2.5 Automatic Switchover

You can use the R&S NetCCU800 to configure the switchover behavior in a dual-drive con-
stellation.

) Select NetCCU > Operation.


The Operation window opens.

3562.0908.72 - 4.27 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

In the Operation menu window you can make settings for the standby behavior (Dual
Drive):

Function Explanation

Tx Operation

Program On/Off ON/OFF command for program path (all components (Exciter and Out-
putstage) that were selected under Preselection)

Reserve On/Off ON/OFF command for standby transmitter


(all components that are not connected to an antenna)

Preselection

Exciter A/B Used to select the exciter that is connected to the preselected output
stage (program path)

Automatic

Exciter On/Off Used to switch the automatic exciter switchover function to active or not
active

Ready Green: Automatic switchover function is ready


Yellow: Automatic switchover function is not ready
Gray: Automatic function is OFF

Changed Yellow: Main exciter has been switched over to the standby exciter.

Delay Delay before a switchover occurs so that a brief fault does not immedi-
ately trigger a switchover.

Reset Fault (context Resets error indicators


menu)
The function has the same effect as the RESET FAULT key on the front
panel of the exciter and also belongs to the range of functions available
for remote operation via the R&S NetCCU800.

3562.0908.72 - 4.28 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

2.6 Entering Exciter Settings

The following settings for the operating mode allow you to influence the way signals are pro-
cessed in the exciter:

Modulation (input type, stereo mode) for main signal and standby signal as appropriate
Pilot tone deviation and signal preemphasis
Nominal deviation and limiter

2.6.1 Selecting Modulation Type and Active Channel


1. Select Exciter A/B FM > Input > Automatic Input.
The Automatic Input window opens.

2. Under Channel 1 and Channel 2 assign the appropriate input type and stereo mode to
the main and/or standby signal.
3. Select the active channel at Selection.

The following table explains the adjustable parameters.

Setting item Description

Operating Mode For setting and displaying audio inputs and stereo mode

Two different modulation types can be preselected. It is possible to


switch between them manually or automatically.

State Displays the status of the channel concerned

3562.0908.72 - 4.29 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

Setting item Description

Channel 1 For setting the audio input and stereo mode for channel 1 a)
(Primary)
Possible selections:
AF Mono L
AF Mono R
AF Mono (L+R)/2
AF Stereo
AES Mono L
AES Mono R
AES Mono (L+R)/2
AES Stereo
MPX Inp2
MPX Inp3

State Status of channel 1 (primary audio input):


OK (green)
Channel 1 is operating normally.
One Ch. Not OK (yellow)
In the case of modulation with stereo or with mono L+R, this status is
displayed if only one of the two feeds for left and right is operating
normally but the other feed is subject to interference.
Not OK (yellow)
Channel 1 has failed completely.

Channel 2 For setting the audio input and stereo mode for channel 2 b)
(Secondary)
Possible selections:
AF Mono L
AF Mono R
AF Mono (L+R)/2
AF Stereo
AES Mono L
AES Mono R
AES Mono (L+R)/2
AES Stereo
MPX Inp2
MPX Inp3
Not Used

State Status of channel 2 (secondary audio input = standby):


OK (green)
Channel 2 is operating normally.
One Ch. Not OK (yellow)
In the case of modulation with stereo or with mono L+R, this status is
displayed if only one of the two channels is operating normally but the
other channel is subject to interference.
Not OK (yellow)
Channel 2 has failed completely.
Not used (gray)
No standby input has been defined.

3562.0908.72 - 4.30 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

Setting item Description

Selection For selecting the active channel

Possible selections:
Ch.1
Ch.2
Auto (automatic input selection): The best available channel is
selected according to the following priority:
1.) Ch.1 is OK. switch to Ch.1
2.) Ch.2 is OK. switch to Ch.2
3.) In Ch.1 there is one channel OK. switch to Ch.1
4.) In Ch.2 there is one channel OK. switch to Ch.2
5.) Switch to Ch.1

State Displays the active channel: Ch.1 or Ch.2

Error Reporting For setting the behavior if the active channel is faulty

By default only the warning "No Input" is created. It may however be


preferred for the exciter to generate a fault message. In this case the
exciter standby would then be switched over to the other exciter.

This is good practice when, for example, there are two separate MPX
feeds. In this case Exciter A can be switched permanently to MPX Inp.2
and Exciter B can be switched permanently to MPX Inp3. In this case
the indicated selection is Ch.1.

Report Type Warning


The active channel creates only the warning "No Input".
Fault
The active channel also generatesthe fault message "No Input".
When the channel is OK again, the defect is automatically reset.

Fail Delay For setting a time interval after which, in the event of a "No Input" warn-
ing, the "No Input" fault message also has to be generated

Only active when Report Type is set to Fault.

a) Since switchovers are allowed for certain combinations only, the number of options offered for selection is
limited depending on the settings for channel 2. To display all possible choices, channel 2 (secondary) must
be set to "Not Used".
b) Since switchovers are allowed for certain combinations only, the number of options offered for selection is
limited depending on the settings for channel 1.

2.6.2 Setting Pilot Tone and Pre-emphasis


Note The settings for pilot tone and preemphasis apply to both channels. Whether a setting is
good practice and feasible, however, depends on the modulation format (input type, stereo
mode). Parameters that are not feasible for the active channel are shown faded out.

1. Select Exciter A/B FM > Modulation.


The Modulation window opens.

3562.0908.72 - 4.31 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

2. Select the desired settings for pilot tone and preemphasis in accordance with the follow-
ing table.

The following table explains the adjustable parameters.

Setting item Description

Pilot tone Setting of the deviation produced by the pilot tone for stereo
Value range: 2 kHz through 10 kHz (default setting 7 kHz)

Active (Pilot tone) Switches the pilot tone on and off (active only in stereo mode; the pilot
tone is always off in mono mode)

Preemphasis Selection of the signal preemphasis: 50 s (default setting) or 75 s

Active (Preemphasis) For switching preemphasis on or off (with MPX mode still inactive)

Display Description

Actual Modulation Displays the current modulation format setting


(the modulation format is defined in the Input > Automatic Input menu
window)

Tip: The context menu (Menu key) contains the entry Mod. Select for
directly calling the Input > Automatic Input menu window. The Back
key takes you back to the original menu.

2.6.3 Setting Nominal Deviation and Configuring Limiter


1. Select Exciter A/B FM > Deviation/Limiter.
The Deviation/Limiter window opens.

3562.0908.72 - 4.32 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

2. Select the desired settings for the integrated stereo coder and the FM modulator in ac-
cordance with the following table.

Setting item/display Description

Nominal Deviation Sets the nominal deviation; a 500 Hz sinewave FM signal at nominal
level is modulated with this deviation
Value range: 40 kHz through 150 kHz (default setting 40 kHz)

The nominal level is set in the Input > Analog Input menu for the analog
inputs and/or in the Input >Digital Input menu for the AES/EBU input.

Limiter Deviation

Threshold Sets the threshold for automatic deviation limitation


Value range: 40 kHz through 150 kHz (default setting 75 kHz)

Active Switches the deviation limiter on or off (default = ON).

Limiter MPX Power

Threshold Sets the threshold for automatic MPX power limitation


Value range: -5.0 through +5.0 dBr (default setting 0 dBr)

Active Switches the MPX power limiter on or off (default = ON).

Display a) Description

Actual Deviation Displays the currently measured deviation

Actual MPX Power Displays the currently measured MPX power

Clipped Deviation Displays the greatest difference between the clipper input and output
during the last second

Limiter Activity Displays the limiter strength

This display gives an approximate measure of how strongly the limiter is


affecting the signal. Value range: 0.0% (= no effect) through 100%

a) The measured values are updated once per second.

3562.0908.72 - 4.33 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

Note In order to ensure compliance with the legal limits for the maximum permissible FM devia-
tion, the exciter has an internal limiter.
The limiter is currently intended only for this purpose. If the limiter threshold is exceeded,
the FM signal is limited to the specified threshold. This causes an increase in the total har-
monic distortion.

If the incoming signal remains at too high a level, the nominal deviation must be reduced
accordingly.

2.6.4 Setting Audio and Data Inputs

2.6.4.1 Setting Analog Inputs and MPX Input

1. Select Exciter A/B FM > Input > Analog Audio.


The Analog Audio window opens.

2. Set the parameters according to the following table.

Setting item Description

Impedance Selection of the input impedance; possible settings:


600 Ohm
>2 kOhm

Level Setting the nominal input amplitude


Value range (analog): -6 dBu through +12 dBu (default setting +6 dBu)
Value range (MPX): -1 dBu through +16 dBu (default setting +6 dBu)

Threshold Setting for the input amplitude threshold for monitoring

The setting can be entered in two ways:


as a percentage of the nominal input amplitude
in the value range: 2% through 80% (default setting 5%)
as an absolute value in dBu

in a value range dependent on the absolute level, corresponding to


input as a percentage

3562.0908.72 - 4.34 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

Display Description

On-Time If the input amplitude is continuously above the threshold during the set
time interval On-Time, the input is considered to be OK.
Value range: 1 s through 6000 s (default setting 5 s)

Off-Time If the input amplitude is continuously below the threshold during the set
time interval Off-Time, the input is considered not to be OK.
Value range: 1 s through 6000 s (default setting 5 s)

2.6.4.2 Setting Digital Input (AES/EBU)

1. Select Exciter A/B FM > Input > Digital Audio.


The Digital Audio window opens.

2. Set the parameters according to the following table.

Setting item Description

Digital Level For setting the nominal digital input amplitude; 0 dBFs corresponds to
full-scale value of the digital signal
Value range: -12 dBFs through 0 dBFs (default setting -3 dBFs)

Threshold Setting for the digital input amplitude threshold for monitoring

The setting can be entered in two ways:


as a percentage of the nominal input amplitude
in the value range: 2% through 80% (default setting 5%)
as an absolute value in dBFs
in a value range dependent on the absolute level, corresponding to
input as a percentage

On-Time If the input amplitude is continuously above the threshold during the set
time interval On-Time, the input is considered to be OK.
Value range: 1 s through 6000 s (default setting 5 s)

3562.0908.72 - 4.35 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

Setting item Description

Off-Time If the input amplitude is continuously below the threshold during the set
time interval Off-Time, the input is considered not to be OK.
Value range: 1 s through 6000 s (default setting 5 s)

2.6.4.3 Setting Data Inputs AUX1 to AUX3 (incl. RDS)

1. Select Exciter A/B FM > Input > Data Input.


The Data Input window opens.

2. Set the parameters according to the following table.


Note The three data inputs AUX1 - 3 have the same priority and identical characteristics. Typ-
ically the RDS signal is supplied on AUX1.

Setting item Description

Input Setting the nominal input amplitude


Value range: -18 dBu through -7 dBu (default setting -14 dBu)

Deviation Setting for the frequency deviation caused by the nominal input level
Value range: 2 kHz through 10 kHz (default setting 4 kHz)

Active Activation of the corresponding input


Selection: On/Off

Threshold Setting for the input amplitude threshold for monitoring

The setting can be entered in two ways:


as a percentage of the nominal input amplitude
in the value range: 2% through 80% (default setting 5%)
as an absolute value in dBu
in a value range dependent on the absolute level, corresponding to
input as a percentage

On-Time If the input amplitude is continuously above the threshold during the set
time interval On-Time, the input is considered to be OK.
Value range: 1 s through 6000 s (default setting 5 s)

3562.0908.72 - 4.36 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

Setting item Description

Off-Time If the input amplitude is continuously below the threshold during the set
time interval Off-Time, the input is considered not to be OK.
Value range: 1 s through 6000 s (default setting 5 s)

2.7 Parameter Sets

In the Parameter Set menu window of the R&S NetCCU800 you can create, load and save
parameter sets for settings of the R&S NetCCU800 and of the components that it controls.
If the operating environment changes (e.g. change of frequency), you can access complete
parameter sets instead of having to set each individual value. You have eight memory loca-
tions available in addition to the current memory location (i.e. the parameter set currently
loaded).

Note To prevent the current transmitter settings from being overwritten inadvertently, the param-
eter sets should always be loaded together with the valid transmitter settings.

1. Select NetCCU > Parameter Set.


The Parameter Set window opens.

2. Under the menu item Save, select the parameter sets to which you want to save the cur-
rent settings.
The data is saved to the selected parameter set. While the data is being saved, Saving
is displayed under the menu item Procedure State.

3. Repeat this procedure until all parameter sets have been saved.

You can make the following settings in the Parameter Set window:

Function Explanation

Parameter Set

Load Used to select a parameter set as the current parameter set; the cur-
rently loaded parameter set acts as an independent copy of the stored
parameter set.

3562.0908.72 - 4.37 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

Function Explanation

Save Used to save the currently active settings under the selected memory
location.

Copy From Used to select a parameter set you want to save to another memory
location. This procedure should only be carried out in offline mode (con-
text menu: Edit offline), otherwise the data will be immediately copied to
the wrong memory location.

Copy To Used to select a memory location to which you want to copy the param-
eter set selected (i.e. copied) above. This procedure should only be car-
ried out in offline mode (context menu: Edit offline). After you have
completed the procedure, implement any changes via the context menu
(Submit changes).

State

Procedure State Displays the status of the action that is being carried out (Ready, Load-
ing, Saving, Copying)

Subdevice Different Yellow: In one of the transmitter components controlled by the R&S
NetCCU800, values are set which deviate from the parameter set cur-
rently selected here.

Values Changed Yellow: The values in the current parameter set no longer correspond to
those in the stored original.

Names

Parameter Set 1 Name describing the parameter set (e.g. purpose)

Parameter Set 2 See above

Parameter Set 3 See above

Parameter Set 4 See above

Parameter Set 5 See above

Parameter Set 6 See above

Parameter Set 7 See above

Parameter Set 8 See above

Context menu

Reload Reloads the parameter set selected under Load as the current parame-
ter set (current values are overwritten).

Resave Saves the current parameter set again at the memory location selected
under Save (the values already stored at this memory location are over-
written).

Recopy Repeats the Copy From / Copy To procedure. The values at the memory
location to which the copied parameter set is written are overwritten.

Save Changes Changes made to the current parameter set are saved.

3562.0908.72 - 4.38 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

3 Completion of Procedure for Putting Transmit-


ter into Operation

When the steps described in the above sections have been carried out the transmitter is
ready to operate. Each transmitter receives a test report from the final testing department
complete with measurement data on every quality parameter. This means that on site com-
pliance testing is only necessary at the customer's request.

3.1 Final Steps

3.1.1 Checking Output Stage Status Display


1. Select Outputstage > Status > OS Status.
The OS Status window opens.

2. Check the status of the warning and error indicators.If a transmitter is ready to operate,
no warnings or errors will be signaled.
3. Select Outputstage > Status > Rack Status > Rack1 > Rack Controller.
The Rack Status > Rack1 > Rack Controller window opens.

3562.0908.72 - 4.39 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

4. Check the status of the warning and error indicators.If a transmitter is ready to operate,
no warnings or errors will be signaled.

3.1.2 Checking Exciter Status Display


1. Select Exciter A/B > Status > Overview.
The Overview window opens.

2. Check the status of the warning and error indicators. If no warnings or errors are sig-
naled, the transmitter is ready to operate.

Note Detailed information on the status of the input interfaces or the mainboard can be found in
the following menu windows:

Status of the audio inputs: Exciter A/B > Status > Analog Status
Status of the data inputs: Exciter A/B > Status > Analog Status
Hardware status of the mainboard: Exciter A/B > Status > Mainboard

3.1.3 Checking R&S NetCCU800 Status Display


1. Select NetCCU > Status > Device Status.
The Device Status window opens.

3562.0908.72 - 4.40 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

2. Check the status of the warning and error indicators. If a transmitter is ready to operate,
no warnings or errors will be signaled.
3. Select NetCCU > Status > RF Status.
The RF Status window opens.

4. Check the status of the warning and error indicators. If a transmitter is ready to operate,
no warnings or errors will be signaled.
5. Select NetCCU > Status > Tx Status.
The Tx Status window opens.

6. Check the status of the warning and error indicators.If a transmitter is ready to operate,
no warnings or errors will be signaled.

3.2 Clearing Event Memories

There are four event memories for each of the R&S NetCCU800, exciter and OS (output
stage) modules.

Summary
Status
Warning
Fault

3562.0908.72 - 4.41 - EN-5


Chapter 4 Putting into Operation

These event memories need to be cleared for all the modules before the transmitter begins
regular transmission.

1. Select NetCCU > Logbook > Summary.


The Status window opens.

2. Select the Clear Logbook command in the context menu.


The entries are cleared.

3. Repeat the procedure for each of the event memories listed.

3562.0908.72 - 4.42 - EN-5


Broadcasting Division

CHAPTER 5

OPERATION

Printed in Germany

3562.0908.72 - 5.1 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

CONTENTS

1 General Information ......................................................................... 6


1.1 Local Operation ..............................................................................................6
1.1.1 Menu Keys ...................................................................................................6
1.1.2 Operating Structure ......................................................................................7
1.1.2.1 Navigation in Menu System ................................................................................ 7
1.1.2.2 Selecting and Editing Entries ............................................................................. 9
1.1.2.3 Context Menu ................................................................................................... 10
1.2 Remote Operation or Remote Control ........................................................11
1.2.1 Installation and Configuration .....................................................................11
1.2.2 Browser-Based Operation ..........................................................................14
1.3 User Administration .....................................................................................18
1.3.1 Creating, Changing and Deleting Users .....................................................19
1.3.2 Closing Active Sessions .............................................................................21
1.4 Monitoring and Control via SNMP ..............................................................22
1.4.1 Installation ..................................................................................................22
1.4.1.1 Settings on Transmitter Side ............................................................................ 22
1.4.1.2 Settings on Manager Side ................................................................................ 23
1.4.1.3 Testing SNMP Communication ........................................................................ 24
1.4.1.4 Configuration .................................................................................................... 27

2 Menus of R&S NetCCU800 ............................................................ 31


2.1 Overview of Menus .......................................................................................31
2.2 Login ..............................................................................................................33
2.3 Status Menu ..................................................................................................34
2.3.1 Tx Status Menu Window ............................................................................34
2.3.2 RF Status Menu Window ............................................................................35
2.3.3 Device Status Menu Window .....................................................................36
2.4 Logbook Menu ..............................................................................................36
2.4.1 Summary Menu Window ............................................................................37
2.5 Operation Menu Window .............................................................................38
2.6 Setup Menu ...................................................................................................39
2.6.1 Tx Setup Menu Window .............................................................................39
2.6.2 Option Keys Menu ......................................................................................40
2.6.2.1 Status Menu Window ....................................................................................... 40
2.6.2.2 Install Menu Window ........................................................................................ 41
2.6.2.3 Menfenster Deactivations ............................................................................... 42

3562.0908.72 - 5.3 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

2.6.3 NetCCU Setup Menu ..................................................................................43


2.6.3.1 Common Menu Window ................................................................................... 43
2.6.3.2 System Menu Window ...................................................................................... 44
2.6.3.3 SW Maintenance Menu Window ...................................................................... 44
2.6.3.4 Network Submenu ............................................................................................ 45
2.6.3.5 Network > Front Ethernet Menu Window ......................................................... 46
2.6.3.6 Network > Rear Ethernet Menu Window .......................................................... 47
2.6.3.7 Services Submenu ........................................................................................... 48
2.6.3.8 Services > SNMP > General Menu Window .................................................... 48
2.6.3.9 Services > SNMP > Manager Menu Window ................................................... 49
2.6.3.10 Services > SNMP > Alarmsinks Menu Window ................................................ 50
2.6.3.11 Services > RS232 Menu Window ..................................................................... 51
2.6.3.12 Services > NTP Menu Window ......................................................................... 51
2.7 RF Probe Antenna Menu ..............................................................................52
2.7.1 RF Probe Forward Menu Window ..............................................................52
2.7.2 RF Probe Reflected Menu Window ............................................................53
2.7.3 RF Probes Measure Values Menu Window ...............................................54
2.8 Device Info Menu ..........................................................................................55
2.8.1 NetCCU Menu Window ..............................................................................55
2.8.2 Mainboard Menu Window ...........................................................................55
2.9 Measure Values Menu Window ...................................................................56
2.10 Parameter Set Menu Window ......................................................................57

3 Menus of Exciter A/B ..................................................................... 59


3.1 Overview of Exciter Menus ..........................................................................59
3.2 Status Menu ..................................................................................................62
3.2.1 Status Displays, Warnings and Fault Messages ........................................62
3.2.2 Status > Overview Menu Window ..............................................................63
3.2.3 Status > Mainboard Menu Window ............................................................66
3.2.4 Status > Analog Status Menu Window .......................................................68
3.2.5 Status > Digital Status Menu Window ........................................................69
3.3 Logbook Menu ..............................................................................................71
3.3.1 Logbook > Summary/Status/Warning/Fault Menu Window ........................72
3.3.2 Logbook Context Menu ..............................................................................72
3.3.3 Overview of Logbook Messages ................................................................73
3.4 Setup Menu ...................................................................................................75
3.4.1 Setup > Ethernet Menu Window ................................................................75
3.4.2 Setup > Date/Time Menu Window .............................................................76
3.5 Input Menu ....................................................................................................76
3.5.1 Input > Analog Audio Menu Window ..........................................................77

3562.0908.72 - 5.4 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

3.5.1.1 Signal Monitoring at Analog Inputs ................................................................... 78


3.5.2 Input > Digital Audio Menu Window ...........................................................79
3.5.2.1 Signal Monitoring at Digital Input ...................................................................... 79
3.5.3 Input > Data Input Menu Window ...............................................................80
3.5.3.1 Signal Monitoring .............................................................................................. 81
3.5.4 Input > Automatic Input Menu Window ......................................................81
3.5.4.1 Audio Input and Stereo Mode ........................................................................... 83
3.6 Modulation Menu ..........................................................................................84
3.7 Deviation/Limiter Menu ................................................................................85
3.7.1 Deviation and MPX Limiter .........................................................................86
3.8 RF Menu ........................................................................................................87
3.9 Device Info Menu ..........................................................................................88
3.9.1 Device Info > Device Menu Window ..........................................................89
3.9.2 Device Info > Mainboard Menu Window ....................................................90
3.9.3 Device Info > Boot Flash Menu Window ....................................................90

4 Menus of Outputstage A/B ............................................................ 92


4.1 Overview of Outputstage A/B Menus .........................................................92
4.2 Status Menu ..................................................................................................93
4.2.1 OS Status Menu Window ...........................................................................93
4.2.2 Status/Rack Controller Menu Window ........................................................95
4.3 Logbook Menu ..............................................................................................96
4.3.1 Logbook Menu Window ..............................................................................96
4.4 Output Power Menu ......................................................................................99
4.4.1 Output Power Menu Window ......................................................................99
4.5 Setup Menu ...................................................................................................99
4.5.1 OS Setup Menu Window ..........................................................................100
4.6 Measure Values Menu ................................................................................100
4.6.1 Measure Values/Rack Controller Menu Window ......................................100
4.6.2 Measure Values/Amplifier x Menu Window ..............................................101
4.7 Device Info Menu ........................................................................................102
4.7.1 Device Info/Rack Controller Menu Window ..............................................102

3562.0908.72 - 5.5 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

1 General Information

Transmitters are operated by means of the graphical user interface of the R&S NetCCU800.
The R&S NetCCU800 can be operated in the following ways:

Local operation via the display and menu keys on the front panel of the R&S
NetCCU800
Operation via a web browser
Monitoring and control via SNMP

If operated via the web browser of a connected PC/client computer, two modes are possi-
ble:

Remote operation via a directly connected PC


Remote control via a remote network client

1.1 Local Operation

1.1.1 Menu Keys

Menu keys

Fig. 1 Menu operation

Key Meaning/function

MENU Access to menu operation (activation from system overview);


call a context menu (activation from menu)

BACK Cancel an entered value if not confirmed with OK; go back


one step in menu

HOME Return from menu tree to system overview

FUNCTION Call a context menu for current menu entry

3562.0908.72 - 5.6 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Key Meaning/function

OK Confirm an entry or selection

STATUS Display the system logbook (when activated from system


overview); display the status screen for a system component
(when activated after selecting a system component from the
menu)

CURSOR KEYS Move through the menu structure and highlight menu ele-
ments; select entries

1.1.2 Operating Structure

1.1.2.1 Navigation in Menu System

Note Different entry screens and menus are displayed depending on whether the R&S
NetCCU800 is used as a NetCCU (transmitter control) or as an NCU/NSU (control of low-
power transmitters / control of n+1 systems).

This is how you navigate within the menu system:

1. Press the MENU key.


The menu is called.

Note When you access the menu system for the first time, you are logged on by default under
the user ID Operation which authorizes you to make settings that directly affect trans-
mitter operation.

2. Select the required menu and confirm with OK.


The overview for the selected menu is then opened (here NetCCU).

3562.0908.72 - 5.7 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

1) Window and title bar for higher-level menus


2) Window and title bar for lower-level menus (submenus of the main menu selected in the window at the left)
3) Window and title bar with explanation of currently selected menu
4) Menu contains additional submenus (no arrow symbol: a menu window will open)

3. Using the cursor keys (up/down/left/right), select a menu from the left/right side of the
window and confirm with OK.
If additional submenus are available, the higher-level menus are shown in the left-hand
window and the lower-level menus are shown in the right-hand window.

4. Using the cursor keys (up/down), select another menu or menu window from the right
side of the window and confirm with OK.
Using the cursor keys (up/down), select an entry in the menu window and confirm with
OK.

1) The entry can be edited.


2) The entry cannot be edited with the current authorization (login).

By using the MENU or FUNCTION key, you can call up a context menu from any position.

Use the BACK key to go back one step in the menu structure (even from the Help win-
dows); you can also use BACK to cancel an entered value as long as you have not already
confirmed it with OK.

Use the HOME key to exit the menu structure and return to the system overview.

3562.0908.72 - 5.8 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

1.1.2.2 Selecting and Editing Entries

Selecting entries

1) The entry can be edited.


2) The entry cannot be edited with the current authorization (login).

1. Select the entry using the cursor keys (up/down).


2. Confirm the selection with OK.
Your selection is saved and displayed in the menu window.

3. Press the HOME key to finish menu editing.

Editing entries

In the editor, it is only possible to add new characters to existing characters. To insert char-
acters at a certain position, you must first delete any existing characters from right to left
and then enter new characters starting at the current cursor position.

The editor is closed by selecting Enter text or Discard; you then return to the menu win-
dow. If you select the Fix Editor command in the context menu, the editor will remain open
until you close it by pressing the Back key.

1) Entry line
2) Selectable characters
3) Command line

3562.0908.72 - 5.9 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

1. To enter characters, move to the required character using the cursor keys and then con-
firm with the OK key.
The selected character appears in the entry line.

or
To delete characters in the entry line, select Del char using the cursor keys and then
confirm with the OK key.
The characters in the entry line are deleted one by one from right to left.

2. To save changes (current entry in the entry line), select Enter text using the cursor keys
and then confirm with the OK key.
This closes the editor, stores the changes and displays them in the menu window.

or
To close the editor without saving the changes, select Discard using the cursor keys and
then confirm with the OK key.
The editor closes and you return to the menu window. Your changes are not saved.

3. Press the HOME key to finish menu editing.

1.1.2.3 Context Menu

The context menu contains function- and content-oriented commands which can be applied
to the currently displayed menu.

The context menu can be called up from any position using the MENU or FUNCTION key.

The content-oriented commands are given in the description for the respective menu win-
dow. The function-oriented commands are listed and described below:

Command Explanation

Info Help texts for the respective menu window/menu item

Open Opens a menu/menu window (alternative to the OK key)

Edit Used to edit a menu item (alternative to the OK key)

3562.0908.72 - 5.10 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Command Explanation

Edit Offline Used to edit a menu item offline; changes are only saved when Submit
Changes (context menu) is selected

Submit Changes Saves changes made offline

Edit Online Used to edit a menu item online; standard setting which can only be
changed by selecting Edit Offline

Enter Text In editor only: Used to save entries (alternative to the "Enter text" com-
mand in the command line of the editor)

Discard In editor only: Used to discard entries (alternative to the "Discard" com-
mand in the command line of the editor)

Fix Editor In editor only: The editor remains open for further editing after entries
have been saved or discarded

Change User Used to change the user profile

1.2 Remote Operation or Remote Control

Remote control (e.g. via a network) and remote operation (e.g. via a PC) both require a web
browser.

Note Depending on their rights, logged-on users can monitor the transmitter in question or con-
trol all of its functions. There is no difference between remote operation and remote control
with respect to this functionality.

The R&S NetCCU800 contains the necessary components for remote operation and re-
mote control as standard:

Network connection (10/100 Mbit)


Network card (RJ-45)
RJ-45 crossover cable

1.2.1 Installation and Configuration

Connecting a PC/client

1. Using an RJ-45 crossover cable, connect the Ethernet socket on the front panel of the
R&S NetCCU800 to a local PC.

3562.0908.72 - 5.11 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Fig. 2 Ethernet link using a crossover cable connection

or
Using an RJ-45 1:1 cable, connect the NETLINK socket (Ethernet NetLink X5) on the
rear panel of the R&S NetCCU800 to your network.

Fig. 3 Link to a network using an RJ-45 1:1 cable connection

Entering IP address at R&S NetCCU800

Before you can use a browser to connect to the R&S NetCCU800 via the connector on the
rear panel of the R&S NetCCU800, you must enter the IP address required for communi-
cation directly via the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800 or have the IP address assigned
automatically. To permit this, the R&S NetCCU800 must be set to local mode (press the Lo-
cal key so that the appropriate LED lights up).

The parameters for connection to the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800 are preset and
cannot be changed.

Note The R&S NetCCU800 has an integrated DHCP client to allow automatic address assign-
ment. For automatic integration into a network, the network must contain a DHCP server.

1. Select the menu NetCCU > Setup > NetCCU Setup > Network > Rear Ethernet at the
front panel of the R&S NetCCU800.

Fig. 4 Entering IP address data

3562.0908.72 - 5.12 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

2. From the context menu, select the Edit Offline mode.


3. To assign the required IP address data automatically, select the ON switch position at
DHCP Client in the Rear Ethernet part of the window.

or (for manual entry)


Select the OFF switch position at DHCP Client in the Rear Ethernet part of the window
and enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway parameters in the respective
parts of the window.
4. In the context menu, select Submit Changes.
The changes will be made.

Configuring browser

The following requirements must be fulfilled before you can operate the R&S NetCCU800
using your browser:

Setting of cookies must be enabled


Scripting of Java applets must be activated
Java Platform Standard Edition must be installed and activated

The next section uses Microsoft Internet Explorer to explain how you can check whether
these conditions have been met or what changes you need to make.

Note Please note that the settings described here need not match your current browser version
one hundred percent.

ATTENTION!
Please note that the modified settings described here may adversely affect the security of
your Internet connections.

All necessary changes and settings can be found in the Tools > Internet Options menu of
your Internet Explorer.

Checking and adapting settings for cookies:

1. Select the Privacy tab and click the Default button if available and not dimmed.
2. Set the privacy level via the slider (all the way down) to Accept All Cookies.

Checking and adapting settings for Java applets:

1. Select the Security tab.


2. For the Internet zone, select the Adapt Level option.
3. In the tree structure, go to Scripting > Scripting of Java applets and select the Enable
option.

Installing Java (Sun) JRE if necessary; checking and adapting settings

1. Select the Advanced tab.

3562.0908.72 - 5.13 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

2. Check whether the entry Java (Sun) JRE ... is present and enabled.
3. If necessary, download and install (standard installation) the Java Runtime Environment
from the Sun website "www.java.com".
4. Then select the Internet Explorer's Advanced tab again and check whether the software
is installed and enabled.

Launching program

Note To be able to operate the R&S NetCCU800 via a PC connected to the front panel, the R&S
NetCCU800 must be set to local mode (press the Local key so that the appropriate LED
lights up).

1. Start the browser on your PC or client.


2. Enter the same IP address as you entered at the R&S NetCCU800.
The login screen appears.

ID Authorization Password

Configuration Allows you to set basic transmitter parameters; e.g. setup 1234

Maintenance Allows you to perform maintenance tasks; e.g. software 1234


update

Operation Allows you to make settings that directly affect transmitter 1234
operation

Query Read-only authorization 1234

Guest a) Read-only authorization see Query 1234

Config-Engl Same as Configuration authorization; this ID also 1234


changes the menu language to English (irrespective of
the preset language, e.g. Chinese)

Superuser a) Allows you to configure, create and delete user profiles 1234
and to display and delete active sessions; no authoriza-
tion for setting transmitter parameters; see Query

a) The IDs Superuser and Guest are only available via the web browser.

3. Log on using the ID you require and confirm with OK.


The corresponding entry screen appears.

1.2.2 Browser-Based Operation


The following entry screen appears after logon:

3562.0908.72 - 5.14 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

1) System Overview: current transmitter status


2) Measure Values: displays the forward and reflected power
3) Navigator: display and navigation through the transmitter menus
4) Menu window: displays the menus selected in the navigator
5) Control panel: elements for navigating within the menu system and for displaying and editing the menu entries

System Overview

The System Overview window provides an overview showing the current status of the
transmitter and its components.

Measure Values

The current forward power and reflected power are displayed in the Measure Values win-
dow.

3562.0908.72 - 5.15 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Navigator

The Navigator shows the menus of all system components. You can open the individual
folders and menus by double-clicking with the mouse. The selected menus are displayed
in the menu window.

Menu window

The menu window shows the menu selected in the Navigator window.

3562.0908.72 - 5.16 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

1) Items with double arrow symbol can be changed

Control panel

You can use the control panel to navigate within the menu structure and menus and to
change settings. You activate the individual control elements using the mouse or keyboard.

1) Used for switching between menu entries, for accessing editable values and for entering numeric values; click-
ing the arrow buttons (up/down) increments or decrements a number (corresponds to cursor keys on the key-
board)
2) Used for editing (switch to edit mode) and confirming settings (corresponds to entry key on the keyboard)
3) Corresponds to the UP and DOWN cursor keys (legend 2)
4) Used for quickly switching between menu items, for quickly accessing editable values and for quickly entering
numeric values
5) Usually used to move one level back in the menu structure; also used to cancel settings that have not yet been
confirmed with OK
6) Return to home menu
7) Displays the context menus for the current menu window (standard context menus: Description: help texts;
Open: opens a menu or menu item; Edit: for editing entry; Edit Offline: item can be edited without the change
being applied immediately; Submit Change: submits an item edited offline)
8) Not enabled in this software version

3562.0908.72 - 5.17 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

1.3 User Administration

The user administration facility is available in conjunction with browser-based operation.


The settings that you make in the user administration facility are (provided that no password
is required) also valid for menu access via local operation.

You can use the user administration facility to

change user profiles (users and access rights)


create new user profiles
delete user profiles
close active sessions

The ID Superuser with the factory-set password 1234 gives you extensive user adminis-
tration rights.

1. Log on as Superuser.
2. Select User Administration in the Navigator window.
The processing options and a list of existing users are displayed.

Display Meaning

Select Selects the user to be processed

Name User ID

Logged on The user is not logged on (No) or is logged on once/several times (X


times) at the system

3562.0908.72 - 5.18 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Display Meaning

Web browser The user ID and authorization permit operation via the web browser
(Yes, No)

Front panel The user ID and authorization permit local operation (Yes, No)

Access right Authorization to access transmitter parameters

Is Admin Additional user administration authorization (configuration, creation and


deletion of user profiles)

The following users are factory-set. Only the password can be changed for these users.

ID Authorization Password

Configuration Allows you to set basic transmitter parameters; e.g. setup 1234

Maintenance Allows you to perform maintenance tasks; e.g. software 1234


update

Operation Allows you to make settings that directly affect transmitter 1234
operation

Query Read-only authorization 1234

Guest Read-only authorization see Query 1234

Config-Engl Same as Configuration authorization; this ID also 1234


changes the menu language to English (irrespective of
the preset language, e.g. Chinese)

Superuser Allows you to configure, create and delete user profiles 1234
and to display and delete active sessions; no authoriza-
tion for setting transmitter parameters; see Query

1.3.1 Creating, Changing and Deleting Users

Creating users

1. Select Add new user.

3562.0908.72 - 5.19 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

2. Create the required user profile.

Entry/selection Explanation

Name: User ID (case-sensitive)

Password: Must be at least 6 characters in length (case-sensitive)

Retype password: Enter the password again (case-sensitive)

Web browser The user ID permits menu access via the web browser

Front panel The user ID permits local operation

Access right Selects a factory-set authorization level

Is admin The user also has user administration rights (configuration, creation
and deletion of users; no access to the user profiles Superuser and
Guest)

3. Confirm your entries with Add user; clicking Reset discards your entries.

Changing users

Note All users have the right to change their own password.

1. Select the required user.


2. Select Change selected user.

3562.0908.72 - 5.20 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

3. Change the user profile in the way described under "Creating users".
4. Confirm your changes with Change User; clicking Reset discards your changes.

Deleting users

1. Select the required user.


2. Select Delete selected user.
The user is deleted.

1.3.2 Closing Active Sessions


If you are logged on as Superuser, you can view detailed information on logged-on users
and close active sessions.

1. After logging on, select Show session list.

2. Select the session (the user) that you want to close.


3. Select Delete selected session.
The selected session is closed.

3562.0908.72 - 5.21 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

4. Return to the previous browser window by clicking Show user list.

1.4 Monitoring and Control via SNMP

SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is used for monitoring and controlling a
wide variety of different units in a network. Detailed information about this topic can be
found under http://www.wikipedia.org/.

A description of the unit - the management information base (MIB) - must be loaded in the
central unit ("manager") from which the transmitters are monitored.

A monitored unit contains a program ("agent") which can answer queries from the manager
and execute commands. Furthermore, the agent may of its own accord generate a mes-
sage and send it to the manager. In this way, the central unit can be informed of a fault.

1.4.1 Installation
The MIBs required for monitoring and controlling a transmitter are available in the R&S firm-
ware/software database GLORIS and can be downloaded at any unit. All of the information
required for configuration is contained in the MIBs themselves.

When the transmitter is put into operation, both the agent in the transmitter and the manag-
er must be configured. Additional steps may be necessary if the transmitter is connected
via routers, firewalls or similar devices as they may block data packets.

The XX8000 transmitter family supports the versions SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c.
Alarms can be sent as v1Traps, v2Traps or v2Informs.
Several destinations can be set for fault messages (alarm sinks).
Several communities can be set with Read Only authorization and one with Read/Write
authorization.

1.4.1.1 Settings on Transmitter Side

You can make settings yourself via the local display (if available), the web server or SNMP.
The menu windows of the SNMP menu contain all the settings that are required for access-
ing a transmitter.

Note Changes to these settings are adopted immediately. The instrument does not need to be
restarted.

3562.0908.72 - 5.22 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Note Detailed information about the individual parameters can be found in the descriptions of the
respective menu windows.

1.4.1.2 Settings on Manager Side

To be able to monitor and control a transmitter with SNMP, the MIB of the device and a pro-
gram which can interpret the MIB must be available on the manager side.

You can load all available MIBs from any device using a web browser.

1. Log on using the web browser and select the SNMP Administration menu.
MIBs from Rohde&Schwarz and IRT are available. MIBs from IRT allow transmitters to
be linked using SNMP irrespective of the manufacturer. They are, however, limited with

3562.0908.72 - 5.23 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

respect to their functionality. When using IRT MIBs, you can select the "Inhibit Status"
for local operation (in the same way as for the parallel contacts). If this function is acti-
vated, no alarms/traps are sent when the transmitter is in local mode. You can activate/
deactivate this function using Inhibit Status in the SNMP > General menu window.

The MIBs have the naming convention RS-XX8000-<TV/Radio Standard>-<Standby


Concept/Option>-MIB. An example is RS-XX8000-FM-TX-MIB for single transmitters.

MIB Description

RS-COMMON-MIB Contains general Rohde&Schwarz definitions

RS-XX8000-COM- Contains definitions which all XX8000 transmitters fulfill (e.g. type
MON-MIB plate, configuration)

RS-XX8000-FM-TX- Contains definitions for FM single transmitters with passive exciter


MIB standby and active and passive output-stage standby

RS-XX8000-FM-NP1- Contains definitions for FM n+1 systems


MIB

2. Save the required ZIP file to your PC.


3. Load the following MIBs:
a) RS-COMMON-MIB
b) RS-XX8000-COMMON-MIB
c) MIB of the standby concept or option

A detailed description of the MIBs, the information that they contain and the associated op-
tions is given below.

1.4.1.3 Testing SNMP Communication

SNMP communication is properly set up if you have loaded the MIBs in your program and
you are using the correct IP address of the transmitter and the correct community. For que-
ries and settings you must set the SNMP version in your manager; the transmitters detect
the used protocol automatically.

The following query can be used as a simple test:

3562.0908.72 - 5.24 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

In the example above, a transmitter with the IP address 10.123.10.7 queries the OID (Ob-
jectIdentifier: unique designation of a data point) serialNumber
(.1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.1.1.1.2). The reply from the agent is 100111.

Using a further test, you can check whether the transmitter sends an alarm message in the
event of an error and whether this message reaches the alarm destinations. To do so, set
an OID sendTestTrap (.1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.1.1.2.3) to the value 2, which triggers
a testTrap (.1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.1.2.0.1). This alarm is sent to all receivers which
have been entered for the alarms (Trapsinks, see above).

This type of fault message functions using a slightly different mechanism than that used for
querying and setting values (standard: UDP Port 161 for SET/GET and UDP Port 162 for
alarms).

3562.0908.72 - 5.25 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

The following illustration shows that the testTrap has been received correctly by the unit
with the serial number 100111.

Known problems

If querying of the data does not work or if you do not receive an alarm, check the following:

Has the network been connected correctly? The SNMP connection only functions via
the remote Ethernet interface of the device (R&S NetCCU800: X5 NETLINK, R&S
Sx800: X2 ETHERNET).
Are the network settings (IP address, gateway) correct?
Is the correct community entered for access in the manager and in the transmitter (case-
sensitive)?
Is a PC firewall blocking incoming SNMP packets?

3562.0908.72 - 5.26 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Has the program which receives alarms been started and correctly configured?
In large networks: Is a router or firewall blocking the SNMP packets?
Is message suppression (Inhibit Status in the SNMP > General menu) activated?

1.4.1.4 Configuration

This chapter provides an overview of the available properties.

RS-XX8000-COMMON-MIB

This MIB contains general data that supports every unit:

type plate: serial number, software version, etc


SNMP configuration: table for alarm destinations and alarm versions
triggering of a test trap
counter for counting the transmitted traps
list of the alarm messages last transmitted
parameters which are used in several other MIBs

This information always concerns the unit that is being monitored by means of SNMP, for
example the NSU in an n+1 system.

RS-XX8000-DVB-TX-MIB

This MIB contains the parameters for:

the standby concepts "single transmitter", "passive exciter standby", "active output-
stage standby" and "passive output-stage standby"
all power classes (low-power, medium-power and high-power)
air-cooled and liquid-cooled transmitters

Different parameters are available depending on the system being queried. For example,
cmdTxOpModeExcAutomatic (.1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.4.1.1.1.7) gives the reply
NoSuchName if you query a single transmitter since this transmitter does not have an au-
tomatic exciter function. It is easy to find out which parameters are valid by checking the
module compliances (e.g. under .1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.4.5.2).

Example: DVB configuration, passive exciter standby, medium power, optional DVB receiv-
er module with two inputs.

Valid MIBs:

RS-COMMON-MIB
RS-XX8000-COMMON-MIB
RS-XX8000-DVB-TX-MIB
RS-XX8000-DVB-TX-REC-MIB

The valid OIDs for the transmitter are contained in the Module Compliance path. The OID
contains references to the individual groups.

3562.0908.72 - 5.27 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Fig. 5 RS-XX8000-DVB-TX-MIB

1) Name and OID for DualDrive MediumPower


2) Reference to groupEvents - 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.4.5.1.1
3) Reference to groupDualDriveMP - 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.4.5.1.4
4) Reference to groupAlarmDualDriveMP - 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.4.5.1.5

Fig. 6 List of parameters (excerpt) for groupDualDriveMP

1) Name and OID for DualTuner


2) Reference to groupDualTuner - 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.2.5.1.3
3) groupAlarmDualTuner - 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.2.5.1.5

The groups contain all valid OIDs. The valid OIDs for the receiver module are contained in
the "Module Compliance" path of the RS-XX8000-DVB-TX-REC-MIB. The OID contains
references to the individual groups. The groups contain all valid OIDs.

RS-XX8000-DVB-NP1-MIB

This MIB contains all the parameters required for any DVB n+1 system, irrespective of the
following features of the individual transmitter:

variant
power class
cooling system

3562.0908.72 - 5.28 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Once again, unavailable parameters receive the reply NoSuchName, e.g. parameters from
the transmitter A8 if only a 4+1 system is available (see module compliances under
.1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.2).

Setting alarms

The transmitter-specific alarms offer an extensive range of configuration possibilities.

Depending on the available system, it is possible to set detailed alarms: for example, for
every item of status information in every amplifier in every rack of every transmitter in a me-
dium-power n+1 system. In addition, it is also possible to assign a freely selectable priority
and to check the current status.

In the screenshot above, the following information is contained in the highlighted row (de-
pending on the used MIB; here: DVB n+1 medium-power system):

Position of code
Meaning of position Value Meaning of value
number

1 Transmitter 1 Transmitter TxB

2 Output stage 1 Output stage A

3 Transmitter rack 1 Transmitter rack No. 1

4 Amplifier 4 Amplifier No. 4

5 Event 84 Amplifier ON/OFF

Table 7 Instance column (1.1.1.4.84) in numeric order

Column Meaning Value Explanation

eventTxName(6) Designation of event txAmpPowerOn(84) Amplifier ON/OFF

eventTxMask(7) Message for event disable(2) No alarm is sent

eventTxPriority(8) Priority for event Value freely selectable Default setting when
by customer supplied: 1

eventTxEvent(9) Current status of active(1) Amplifier ON


amplifier (inactive(2)) (Amplifier OFF)

Table 8 Meaning of other columns

The columns containing the value Not accessible are "index" columns (identified by IDX).
OIDs of these columns cannot be queried; they are used for internal purposes only.

3562.0908.72 - 5.29 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Example: DVB, N+1, low power

Valid MIBs:

RS-COMMON-MIB
RS-XX8000-COMMON-MIB
RS-XX8000-DVB-NP1-MIB

Valid OIDs in "Module Compliance" path for N+1 low power:

Name: rsXx8000DVBNplus1LP
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.2.2

Groups:

groupNsuLP - 1.36.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.1.6
groupAlarmNsuLP" - 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.1.7
groupTxLP - 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.1.8
groupAlarmTxLP - 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.1.9
groupEvents - 1.3.6.1.4.1.2566.127.1.2.167.5.5.1.5

3562.0908.72 - 5.30 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

2 Menus of R&S NetCCU800

2.1 Overview of Menus

Menu structure of R&S NetCCU800

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5

Status

Tx Status

RF Status

Device Status

Logbook

Summary

Status

Warning

Fault

Operation

Setup

TX Setup

Option Keys

Status

Install

Deactivations

3562.0908.72 - 5.31 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Menu structure of R&S NetCCU800

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5

NetCCU Setup

Common

System

SW Mainte-
nance

Network

Front Ethernet

Rear Ethernet

Services

SNMP

General

Manager

Alarmsinks

RS232

NTP

RF Probe
Antenna

RF Probe For-
ward

RF Probe
Reflected

RF Probes Mea-
sure Values

Device Info

NetCCU

Mainboard

Measure Values

Parameter Set

3562.0908.72 - 5.32 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

2.2 Login

Various authorization levels protect against nondeliberate access of critical system settings
from the home menu. When you start local operation via the keypad and display of the R&S
NetCCU800, your user ID is Operation by default.

Note If you have the appropriate authorization, you can change, create or delete user profiles us-
ing the user administration facility (called up via the web browser).

You can change your user ID in any menu using the Change User context menu. When in
local operation mode, you do not need to enter a password to change the user ID.

You can select a user profile by clicking Select user from list.

Note The fields Or type user name and Type password are reserved for R&S Service person-
nel only.

The following user profiles are factory-set:

ID Authorization Password

Configuration Allows you to set basic transmitter parameters; e.g. setup 1234

Maintenance Allows you to perform maintenance tasks; e.g. software 1234


update

3562.0908.72 - 5.33 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

ID Authorization Password

Operation Allows you to make settings that directly affect transmitter 1234
operation

Query Read-only authorization 1234

Config-Engl Same as Configuration authorization; this ID also 1234


changes the menu language to English (irrespective of
the preset language, e.g. Chinese)

Note To use the menus via the web interface, you must enter a password (factory setting: 1234).
All users can change their own password via the web interface.

2.3 Status Menu

The Status menu provides an overview of faults, warnings and status messages relating to
the individual components and functions of the transmitter.

2.3.1 Tx Status Menu Window


The Tx Status menu window provides an overview of faults, warnings and status messages
relating to the communication and standby status of the transmitter.

The Tx Status menu window is divided into three parts (from top left to bottom right):

Sum fault / local mode


Exciter status messages
Output stage status messages (rack/amplifier)

Display Explanation

Fault Red: Sum message "Fault"; a fault message has been output in the
transmitter system

3562.0908.72 - 5.34 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Display Explanation

Warning Yellow: Sum message "Warning"; a warning message has been output
in the transmitter system

Local Yellow: R&S NetCCU800 has been switched over to local mode

Exciter

Comm Ex. A Red: Communication error between R&S NetCCU800 and exciter A

Comm Ex. B Red: Communication error between R&S NetCCU800 and exciter B

Outputstage

Comm. OS. A Red: Communication error between R&S NetCCU800 and output stage
A

2.3.2 RF Status Menu Window


The RF Status menu window provides an overview of the transmitter's RF status.

Display Explanation

RF On Green: Antenna output power is above the set fault threshold

RF OK Green: Antenna output power is above the set warning threshold

Loop Antenna Green: Main loop is closed


Yellow: Main loop is open

Loop Dummyload Green: Main loop is closed


Yellow: Main loop is open

RF Warning Yellow: RF is below warning threshold

RF Fault Red: RF is below fault threshold

Reflection Warning Yellow: Reflected power is below warning threshold

3562.0908.72 - 5.35 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Display Explanation

Reflection Fault Red: Reflected power is below fault threshold

2.3.3 Device Status Menu Window


The Device Status menu window provides an overview of faults, warnings and status mes-
sages relating to the R&S NetCCU800.

Display Explanation

Power Supply Red: At least one of the internal operating voltages of the R&S
NetCCU800 is outside its permissible range.

Device Temp. Red: Temperature inside the R&S NetCCU800 is too high; otherwise
green

Fan Yellow: Fan of the R&S NetCCU800 has failed

2.4 Logbook Menu

You can use the Logbook menu to query status and fault messages about the R&S
NetCCU800. The Logbook menu windows provide an overview of the status, warning and
fault messages relating to the R&S NetCCU800.

Note You can call up logbook entries in the windows Summary, Status, Warning and Fault. The
structure of the four windows is identical.

3562.0908.72 - 5.36 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

2.4.1 Summary Menu Window

Fig. 9 Logbook > Summary window

The following table explains the meaning of the columns:

Column Description

No Consecutive entry number

Message Message

Time Time the message was received

Date Date the message was received

The arrows in the second column have the following meanings:

Arrow direc-
Arrow color Description
tion

Up The event has just occurred.

Down The event is no longer current or relevant.

Red Fault

Yellow Warning

Green Status: In order

3562.0908.72 - 5.37 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

2.5 Operation Menu Window

In the Operation menu window you can make settings for the standby behavior and for the
exciter and amplifier.

Function Explanation

Tx Operation

Program On/Off ON/OFF command for program path (all components (Exciter and Out-
putstage) that were selected under Preselection)

Reserve On/Off ON/OFF command for standby transmitter


(all components that are not connected to an antenna)

Preselection

Exciter A/B Used to select the exciter that is connected to the preselected output
stage (program path)

Automatic

Exciter On/Off Used to switch the automatic exciter switchover function to active or not
active

Ready Green: Automatic switchover function is ready


Yellow: Automatic switchover function is not ready
Gray: Automatic function is OFF

Changed Yellow: Main exciter has been switched over to the standby exciter.

Delay Delay before a switchover occurs so that a brief fault does not immedi-
ately trigger a switchover.

Reset Fault (context Resets error indicators


menu)
The function has the same effect as the RESET FAULT key on the front
panel of the exciter and also belongs to the range of functions available
for remote operation via the R&S NetCCU800.

3562.0908.72 - 5.38 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

2.6 Setup Menu

You can use the Setup menu to configure the transmitter system's hardware.

2.6.1 Tx Setup Menu Window


In the Tx Setup menu window you can define the standby behavior and make additional
system-specific settings.

Setting item Explanation

Tx Mode Used to select the transmitter standard


FM: analog sound broadcasting standard
ATV: analog TV standard
DVB: digital TV standard

ATV Mode Selection only possible if ATV is set under Tx Mode


Comb Single: vision signal and sound signal are transmitted via one
amplifier (same channel) (single = 1 sound carrier)
Comb Dual: vision signal and sound signal are transmitted via one
amplifier (same channel) (dual = 2 sound carriers)

Power Mode Setting for medium-power transmitters


Medium

Cooling System Used to select the cooling system


Air
Water

Tx Type Used to set the standby behavior:


Single Tx: standby system (see below)
Dual Drive: standby system (see below)

Power Switch Used to set the hardware configuration for antenna switchover. The fol-
lowing options are available:
"Manual" for manual antenna switchover
"Automatic" for electronic antenna switchover

Antenna Type Country-specific setting for the antenna type; the default setting is Full

3562.0908.72 - 5.39 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Basic setting of the transmitter standby systems

Setting: Setting:
Transmitter standby system
Tx Type Power Switch

Single transmitter system Single Tx Manual

2 exciters / 1 amplifier stage Dual Drive Manual

2.6.2 Option Keys Menu


Certain features of the device are activated using the Option Keys mechanism.

Each available software option can be enabled by installing a valid activation key. If a soft-
ware option is later no longer required, activation can be canceled again by installing a de-
activation key.

Note The deactivation mechanism allows software options which are no longer required to be
"returned" to Rohde & Schwarz.

Option keys are available from your local Rohde & Schwarz sales partners.

Installing option keys

Option keys can be installed in three ways:

Automatic installation of one or more activation keys using the Software Distributor
Installation of an option key by means of a web browser
With this method, the option key can be transferred from, for example, a received mail
using the copy/paste function.
Installation of an option key directly at the display
With this method, a 30-digit code is entered using the keyboard.

The two last methods use the installation menu Setup > Option Keys > Install described
below.

2.6.2.1 Status Menu Window

The Setup > Option Keys > Status menu window lists the available software options with
their respective activation status.

3562.0908.72 - 5.40 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

List column Explanation

K The K material number and stock number of the device are used to
order an option key to activate a software option from Rohde & Schwarz
sales partners.

Name Name of the software option

Status of a software option:


Green (OK): Option has been activated
Gray: Option has not been activated

Validity Validity period of an installed option key:


Permanent: Option activated for an unlimited period (standard
license)
"Expiry date": Option remains activated until the displayed expiry date
(e.g. as a test license)

If the activation mechanism is not supported by the hardware, all soft-


ware options are activated automatically (status = OK). In this case, no
validity period is displayed in the Validity column.

2.6.2.2 Install Menu Window

The Setup > Option Keys > Install menu window is used to install option keys manually.

3562.0908.72 - 5.41 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Setting item Explanation

Option Key Used to enter a 30-digit code to activate (or deactivate) a software
option. Entry of the code is completed with Enter or OK.

Display Explanation

Status Status = OK: The mechanism used to activate/deactivate software


options is supported by the hardware.
To be able to use a software option, the associated option key must
be installed.
No key needed: The mechanism used to activate/deactivate software
options is not supported by the hardware.
All available software options can be used without installing option
keys.

Message Dialog box with the following messages:


Please enter a key: Prompt to enter a key
Key OK: Key entered successfully (the display changes back to
"Please enter a key" after a few moments)
Key deactivated: Deactivation key entered successfully (the display
changes back to "Please enter a key" after a few moments)
Invalid format: Invalid key entered

2.6.2.3 Deactivations Menu Window

The Setup > Option Keys > Deactivations menu window lists software options which
were once active, but have been deactivated again using a deactivation key.

Column Explanation

K The K material number and stock number of the device are used for
ordering an option key to activate a software option from Rohde &
Schwarz sales partners.

Name Name of the software option

3562.0908.72 - 5.42 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Column Explanation

Response Acknowledgment code as a system response to a deactivation

To prove that a software option has been deactivated, the acknowledg-


ment code must be sent to the Rohde & Schwarz sales partner (e.g. by
e-mail).

2.6.3 NetCCU Setup Menu


You can enter default system settings via the NetCCU Setup menu.

2.6.3.1 Common Menu Window

In the Common menu window you can make general settings for the system.

Selection Explanation

Date Current date

Time Local time

Display Timeout Time in minutes after which the display switches off (standby)

LED Local Color of the Local LED on the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800 (yel-
low, green)

LED On Color of the ON LED on the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800 (yellow,
green)

Fan Control Used to switch fan monitoring ON/OFF; the fan monitoring function must
be switched off on instruments without fans; rebooting is necessary after
this function has been switched ON/OFF.

3562.0908.72 - 5.43 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

2.6.3.2 System Menu Window

In the System menu window you can make settings which determine how the R&S
NetCCU800 is used. Depending on the selected setting, a different entry screen and differ-
ent menus are displayed after the R&S NetCCU800 is booted.

Selection Explanation

Variant Use of the R&S NetCCU800 as a NetCCU (transmitter control unit) or as


an NSU (control unit for n+1 systems)

Number of Tx Number of transmitters to be controlled (only relevant if the R&S


NetCCU800 is used as an NSU)

Tx Mode Used to select the TV/sound broadcasting standard

RS232 Application Used to define the RS-232-C interface

BitBus Slave TCP Used to define the used TCP port (only for RS232 Application = BitBus
Port Slave)

BitBus Slave CRC Used to define whether CRC is used (only for RS232 Application = Bit-
Bus Slave)

Parallel IO Used to activate/deactivate the parallel remote-control interface

Inhibit Status Used to switch the message inhibit function ON/OFF

2.6.3.3 SW Maintenance Menu Window

In the SW Maintenance menu window you can perform software updates for the R&S
NetCCU800 and the connected exciters.

To perform a software update, you must connect the R&S NetCCU800 to a PC which has
the required updates and update software.

Before you call the update software on the PC, you must set the R&S NetCCU800 to Up-
date mode using the Start NetCCU Update context menu. When you call the update soft-
ware on the PC, the software automatically analyzes which updates need to be installed.
The update procedure is started from the PC by means of the update software.

3562.0908.72 - 5.44 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Updates for the R&S NetCCU800 are installed straight away. In a further step, updates for
the exciter(s) must be started from the R&S NetCCU800 via the Start Exciter A/B Update
context menu.

Note The entire update procedure is described in detail in the chapter "Maintenance" in the R&S
NetCCU800 manual.

Function Explanation

Update Exc A Displays the progress of software update installation for exciter A

Update Exc B Displays the progress of software update installation for exciter B

Reboot The operating system and all applications are restarted.


(context menu)

Restart All applications are restarted; the operating system remains active. Usu-
(context menu) ally, only a restart is required following a software update.

Start NetCCU Update The software updates available for the transmitter system are trans-
(context menu) ferred to the R&S NetCCU800. The new software is then installed auto-
matically on the R&S NetCCU800.

Start Exciter A The software update available on the R&S NetCCU800 is transferred to
Update (context exciter A and then installed automatically.
menu)

Start Exciter B The software update available on the R&S NetCCU800 is transferred to
Update (context exciter B and then installed automatically.
menu)

2.6.3.4 Network Submenu

In the menu windows of the Network menu, you can make the settings required when con-
necting the R&S NetCCU800 to a PC/laptop or LAN/WLAN.

The network settings for the front Ethernet interface are preset. You can configure the set-
tings for the rear interface manually or have them assigned automatically by a DHCP server
in the network.

3562.0908.72 - 5.45 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Menu windows

The Network menu branches to the following menu windows:

Front Ethernet (connection of a PC/laptop using a cross cable): display of the network
settings for the front interface ETHERNET
Rear Ethernet (connection to a LAN/WLAN): display and configuration of the network
settings for the rear Ethernet interface NETLINK (X5)

2.6.3.5 Network > Front Ethernet Menu Window

Display Explanation

IP Address IP address of the network card

Network Mask Subnet mask of the network card

Speed Mode Speed and duplex

Factory setting: 10 Mbit / Half Duplex

Autosensing Autonegotiation ON/OFF

Factory setting: On

Autonegotiation = Automatic determination of the settings for the net-


work card

MAC Address Unique ID of the network card

Notes

All settings for the front Ethernet interface are preset. If a PC/laptop is to be connected, the
network interface on the PC/laptop must be configured accordingly:

IP address (PC): First three segments same as those for IP Address of the R&S
NetCCU800 (see above); a value below 250 must be entered for the last segment
Subnet mask (PC): Same settings as under Network Mask (see above)

3562.0908.72 - 5.46 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

2.6.3.6 Network > Rear Ethernet Menu Window

Setting/display Explanation

IP Address IP address of the network card

Network Mask Subnet mask of the network card

Gateway Gateway address (specified by the network administrator)

DHCP Client Switch used to activate/deactivate the DHCP client:

On: The network settings for IP address, subnet mask and gateway
are retrieved automatically by a DHCP server
Off: The network settings for IP address, subnet mask and gateway
must be entered manually (see above)

Speed Mode a) Speed and duplex

Factory setting: 100 Mbit / Full Duplex

Autosensing a) Autonegotiation ON/OFF

Factory setting: On

Autonegotiation = Automatic determination of the settings for the net-


work card

MAC Address Unique ID of the network card

a) Caution: Only change the settings for Speed Mode and Autosensing in exceptional cases where there are
problems with the network connection.

Notes

Manual settings for remote connection should only be entered in offline mode (context
menu: Edit Offline) and then activated with Submit Changes (context menu).
The IP address must not be in the same network as the front ETHERNET interface.
To allow automatic integration in a network (DHCP Client activated), the network must
contain a DHCP server.

3562.0908.72 - 5.47 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

2.6.3.7 Services Submenu

In the menu windows of the Services menu you can make settings for the SNMP, RS-232-
C and NTP communication interfaces.

Menu windows

The Services menu branches to the following menu windows:

SNMP > General: Used to set the UDP port for SET/GET and to activate message sup-
pression for local operation mode
SNMP > Manager: Used to set access protection for communities
SNMP > Alarmsinks: Used to configure alarm sinks
RS232: Used to configure the RS-232-C interface
NTP: Used to set up synchronization for the transmitter system

2.6.3.8 Services > SNMP > General Menu Window

Function Explanation

Port SET/GET UDP port for SNMP SET/GET

Default setting: 161

Inhibit Status Switch for message suppression in Local mode

Off: Traps (alarm messages) are sent in both operating modes


(Remote and Local)
On: No traps are sent in Local mode but the alarms are stored; excep-
tion: trap for Local Mode

Default setting: Off

If OIDs are polled with message suppression active, the return value is 0
(undefined). In this operating state, SNMP commands (SET) are not
executed but simply confirmed.

When the Remote mode is reactivated, all stored alarms are sent once.
The polling of OIDs again returns current values.

3562.0908.72 - 5.48 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Function Explanation

Max. not transmitted Number of alarms to be stored if message suppression is active

Default setting: 255

2.6.3.9 Services > SNMP > Manager Menu Window

Function Explanation

Access Level [1 5] Used to select access authorization for one of five user groups

Read Only: For GET (only read access to the agent)


Read / Write: For SET (read and write access to the agent)

Community [1 5] Used to set the SNMP community string (a type of password) for a user
group

Default setting: "public" for read only (GET) and "broadcast" for read /
write (SET)

Case-sensitive!

Enable Used to activate (On) or deactivate (Off) a community

The Off setting is used for configuration purposes and for testing.

3562.0908.72 - 5.49 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

2.6.3.10 Services > SNMP > Alarmsinks Menu Window

Function Explanation

Alarmsink Used to select one of 5 alarm sinks for configuration

Enable Used to activate (On) or deactivate (Off) a selected alarm sink

The Off setting is used for configuration purposes and for testing.

IP Address IP address of the alarm sink to which alarms are to be sent

Port UDP port for the SNMP alarms

Default setting: 162

Alarm Version SNMP version in which the alarm is to be sent (v1 Trap, v2c Trap or v2c
Inform)

Traps are sent once only; Informs, however, are repeated several times
until confirmation of the alarm sink is received.

Community Used to select the community (access protection)

The community set here must also be used on the manager side. A dis-
tinction is made between upper-case and lower-case characters.

Communities are configured in the SNMP > Manager menu.

Inform Retry Number of repetitions of an inform (with v2c Inform only)

If after the final repetition of an inform no confirmation of the alarm sink


is received, this alarm is no longer sent.

Inform Timeout Time which is to elapse before an inform is sent again (with v2c Inform
only)

Inform Unackd Number of unconfirmed alarms which can be stored by the agent (with
v2c Inform only)

3562.0908.72 - 5.50 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

2.6.3.11 Services > RS232 Menu Window

In the RS232 menu window you can make settings for the RS-232-C interface.

Function Explanation

Baudrate As required;
if bitbus is used: 19200

Databits Number of data bits of the serial interface (5 to 8)

Stop bits Number of stop bits of the serial interface (1 / 1.5 / 2)

Parity Parity setting

2.6.3.12 Services > NTP Menu Window

In the NTP (Network Time Protocol) menu window you can set up synchronization for the
transmitter system. This ensures that the time settings of all system components are syn-
chronized via a common time server.

3562.0908.72 - 5.51 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Function Explanation

NTP mode Used to deactivate NTP synchronization (disabled) or to activate NTP


synchronization in step mode; the time is synchronized at the interval
which is set under NTP sync-time (e.g. every 3 minutes)

NTP status Displays the current status (running/stopped)

NTP sync-time Used to set the interval at which the device time (client) is synchronized
with the time of the time server

NTP server config Used to select manual or automatic entry/assignment of the IP address
of the time server; in this software version, only manual entry of the IP
address (under NTP server 1) is supported

NTP server 1 Used to enter the IP address of the time server

2.7 RF Probe Antenna Menu

You can use the RF Probe Antenna menu to enter the values required for calibrating the
test point and to read off the current measurement values.

Note In the R&S NetCCU800 system overview, the forward power of the transmitter is displayed
in the left-hand window and the reflected power in the right-hand window on the basis of the
values entered in the menus below.

2.7.1 RF Probe Forward Menu Window


In the RF Probe Forward menu window you define the nominal power of the system. You
can also determine how much the output power is permitted to drop (in dB) before a warning
or fault message is output. It is also possible to set a delay time for the fault threshold.

Note You can calibrate the measuring system and the zero point via the context menu.

3562.0908.72 - 5.52 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Function Explanation

Configuration Definitions and settings for the forward-power test point

Label User-defined name for the RF Probe test point

Nominal Value Used to enter the nominal power of the transmitter

Threshold Setting of upper and lower thresholds for forward power; warnings and
fault messages are issued if these thresholds are crossed

RF Fail Limit Used to select a dB value; a fault message is output if the actual value
drops below this limit value

Timeout RF Fail Con- Used to select the time that the actual value must remain below the RF
trol Fail Limit before an appropriate fault message is generated

Warning Limit Used to select a dB value for the forward power; a warning message is
output if the forward power drops below this value

Set Gain (context Used to calibrate the internal measurement system. The internal mea-
menu) surement value for the entered nominal value can be stored by selecting
Set Gain.

Set Offset (context Used to calibrate the zero point as of which the externally measured
menu) power is displayed. The zero point is calibrated by selecting Set Offset.

2.7.2 RF Probe Reflected Menu Window


In the RF Probe Reflected menu window you can set the warning threshold for the reflect-
ed power (VSWR monitoring). The fault threshold is preset to S > 3 in the software.

Note You can calibrate the measuring system and the zero point via the context menu.

Display/entry Explanation

Configuration Definitions and settings for the reflected-power test point

3562.0908.72 - 5.53 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Display/entry Explanation

Label User-defined name for the RF Probe test point

Threshold Used to set a limit for the reflected power; a warning message is output
if the reflected power exceeds this limit

Warning Limit Used to select a dB value; a warning message is output if the actual
value drops below this limit value

Set Gain (context Used to calibrate the internal measurement system. The internal mea-
menu) surement value for the entered nominal value can be stored by selecting
Set Gain.

Set Offset (context Used to calibrate the zero point as of which the externally measured
menu) power is displayed. The zero point is calibrated by selecting Set Offset.

2.7.3 RF Probes Measure Values Menu Window


The RF Probes Measure Values menu window displays the current power measurement
values and the adjustment values for the two test points.

Display Explanation

RF Probe Forward

Forward Measured forward power

Gain This adjustment value for the trace corresponds to the nominal power of
the transmitter (100 % value).

Offset Threshold for the measurement voltage; the measured power is dis-
played when this threshold is exceeded (zero point of the trace).

RF Probe Reflected

Reflected Measured reflected power

Gain This adjustment value for the trace corresponds to the nominal power of
the transmitter (100 % value).

3562.0908.72 - 5.54 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Display Explanation

Offset Threshold for the measurement voltage; the measured power is dis-
played when this threshold is exceeded (zero point of the trace).

2.8 Device Info Menu

You can use the Device Info menu to display detailed product information about any hard-
ware or software component of the R&S NetCCU800.

2.8.1 NetCCU Menu Window


The NetCCU menu window displays general information about the hardware and software
of the R&S NetCCU800.

Context menu

The context menu provides additional information about the specific component.

2.8.2 Mainboard Menu Window


The Mainboard menu window displays information about the hardware and software of the
R&S NetCCU800 motherboard.

3562.0908.72 - 5.55 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Context menu

The context menu provides additional information about the specific component.

2.9 Measure Values Menu Window

The Measure Values menu window displays the current measurement values for the trans-
mitter test points.

Display Explanation

Monitoring Power Internal voltage value of the R&S NetCCU800 power supply
Supply

Device Temperature Internal temperature of the R&S NetCCU800

RF Probe 1 Voltage of the internal measurement value for the output power at
antenna test point 1 (forward power)

RF Probe 2 Voltage of the internal measurement value for the output power at
antenna test point 2 (reflected power)

3562.0908.72 - 5.56 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

2.10 Parameter Set Menu Window

In the Parameter Set menu window you can load and save parameter sets for settings of
the R&S NetCCU800 and of the components that it controls. If the operating environment
changes (e.g. change of frequency), you can access complete parameter sets instead of
having to set each individual value. You have eight memory locations available in addition
to the current memory location (i.e. the parameter set currently loaded).

Function Explanation

Parameter Set

Load Used to select a parameter set as the current parameter set; the cur-
rently loaded parameter set acts as an independent copy of the stored
parameter set.

Save Used to save the currently active settings under the selected memory
location.

Copy From Used to select a parameter set you want to save to another memory
location. This procedure should only be carried out in offline mode (con-
text menu: Edit offline), otherwise the data will be immediately copied to
the wrong memory location.

Copy To Used to select a memory location to which you want to copy the param-
eter set selected (i.e. copied) above. This procedure should only be car-
ried out in offline mode (context menu: Edit offline). After you have
completed the procedure, implement any changes via the context menu
(Submit changes).

State

Procedure State Displays the status of the action that is being carried out (Ready, Load-
ing, Saving, Copying)

Subdevice Different Yellow: In one of the transmitter components controlled by the R&S
NetCCU800, values are set which deviate from the parameter set cur-
rently selected here.

Values Changed Yellow: The values in the current parameter set no longer correspond to
those in the stored original.

Names

3562.0908.72 - 5.57 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Function Explanation

Parameter Set 1 Name describing the parameter set (e.g. purpose)

Parameter Set 2 See above

Parameter Set 3 See above

Parameter Set 4 See above

Parameter Set 5 See above

Parameter Set 6 See above

Parameter Set 7 See above

Parameter Set 8 See above

Context menu

Reload Reloads the parameter set selected under Load as the current parame-
ter set (current values are overwritten).

Resave Saves the current parameter set again at the memory location selected
under Save (the values already stored at this memory location are over-
written).

Recopy Repeats the Copy From / Copy To procedure. The values at the memory
location to which the copied parameter set is written are overwritten.

Save Changes Changes made to the current parameter set are saved.

3562.0908.72 - 5.58 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

3 Menus of Exciter A/B

3.1 Overview of Exciter Menus

Level 1 > Level 2 / 3> Parameter

Status > Overview > Status indications:


RF (On, Off, Fail)
Mainboard (OK, Warning, Error)
Audio Ch1 (OK, One Ch. Not OK, Not OK)
Audio Ch2 (OK, One Ch. Not OK, Not OK, Not
Used)
Data Input
Outpt Open
Local
Interlock
Mute
Fan1
Fan2
Ext. Ref. (Off, OK, Not OK)

Measured values:
Selected Audio (Type, Channel, Status)
Deviation
Modulation Power

Mainboard > Status indications:


RF Unit
Supply Unit
FPGA Loaded
EEPROM
Main PLL
UPC PLL
Clk PLL
CF Card

Measured values:
Temperature
12V Fans
12V Rack Controller

3562.0908.72 - 5.59 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Level 1 > Level 2 / 3> Parameter

Analog Status > Displays in each case for


AF Left / AF Right, MPX as well as AUX1 / AUX2 /
AUX3:
Nominal Level
Current Level (in % and dBu)
Status (Off, OK, Clipped, Level too low)

Digital Status > Indicators for AES Left / AES Right in each case:
Nominal Level
Current Level (in % and dBFs)
Status (Off, OK, Level too low)

Further indications:
Sample Rate
Preemphasis
Audio detect
Non-PCM Audio
Channel Status Valid
Channel Status CRC
Parity/Biphase Error
Clock

Logbook > Summary > Logged information:


No
Status > Message
Time
Warning >
Date
Set or Reset
Fault >
(for warnings and fault messages only)

Setup > Ethernet > Setting items or indications


(Front Ethernet/Rear Ethernet):
IP Address
Subnet Mask
MAC

Date / Time > Setting items:


Date
Time

Input > Analog Audio > Setting items in each case for Analog and MPX:
Impedance
Level
Threshold (in % or dBu)
On-Time
Off-Time

Input > Digital Audio > Setting items for AES/EBU:


Level
Threshold (in % or dBFs)
On-Time
Off-Time

Input > Data Input > Setting items (separate) for AUX1/2/3:
Level
Deviation
Active (On/Off)
Threshold (in % or dBu)
On-Time
Off-Time

3562.0908.72 - 5.60 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Level 1 > Level 2 / 3> Parameter

Input > Automatic Input > Setting items:


Channel 1 (Primary)
Channel 1 (Secondary)
Selection (Ch.1, Ch.2, Auto)
Report Type (Error or Warning)
Report Delay

Indications:
Channel 1 Status
Channel 2 Status
Selected Channel

Modulation > Indications:


Actual Modulation Type

Setting items:
Pilot Tone Deviation
Active Pilot Tone
Preemphasis
Activate Preemphasis

Deviation/Limiter > Setting items:


Nominal Deviation

Setting items (separate) for Deviation/MPX Limiter:


Limiter Threshold
Activate Limiter (On/Off)

Indications:
Actual Deviation
Actual MPX Power
Clipped Deviation
Limiter Activity

RF > Setting items:


RF Output (On/Off)
Frequency
Clock Reference
TCXO Trim Value

Indications:
External Reference State
External Reference Locked

Device Info > Device > Indications:


Part Number
Variant
Product index
Serial Number
Production Date
Software/Firmware Number
Software/Firmware Version
FPGA Firmware Version
OS Version

Device Info > Mainboard > Indications:


Part Number
Variant
Product index
Serial Number
Production Date
Operating hours
Power-up cycles

3562.0908.72 - 5.61 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Level 1 > Level 2 / 3> Parameter

Device Info > Boot Flash > Indications:


Bootload Part Number
Bootload Version
Bootprog Part Number
Bootprog Version

3.2 Status Menu

The menu windows in the Status menu summarize the current status of the exciter. Color
coding (gray, green, yellow and red) is used to indicate status information, warnings and
error messages. Internal measured values are also displayed.

The menu windows

The Status menu leads to the following menu windows:

Overview: For a general summary


Mainboard: Detailed status of the mainboard
Analog Status: Detailed status of the analog audio inputs
Digital Status: Detailed status of the digital AES/EBU input

3.2.1 Status Displays, Warnings and Fault Messages

Indicator colors and their meaning

When warnings and error messages occur, this usually means that transmission operation
is impaired. Different colors are used to distinguish the severity of an impairment or the
"quality" of a defect. The following applies:

Green...................................... There is no impairment.


Yellow ..................................... Although the exciter is functional, it is possible that external
influences are disrupting transmission operation.
Red ......................................... A severe error has occurred so that transmission operation
is generally impossible.
Gray........................................ The function concerned is currently not active.

Indications with and without memory effect

Status displays (green) and warnings (yellow) always reflect the current status of the excit-
er.

Since error messages (red) usually refer to a defect in the instrument, and this defect does
not repair itself, the messages remain active even after the reason for the error has passed
or the error has been corrected. If the error has been corrected, you can reset the error dis-
play with the RESET key.

3562.0908.72 - 5.62 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

There are however some exceptions to this rule, particularly when the software itself can
recognize that the cause of the error has passed. Examples of this error type are "No Input"
(during error configuration) or "Temperature Fail".

3.2.2 Status > Overview Menu Window


You can use the Overview menu window to easily trace defective system statuses:

Hardware faults are displayed as summaries of the faults shown in detail in the Main-
board submenu.
The status of the input interfaces is displayed separately for each logical input with the
aid of Audio Ch1, Audio Ch2 and Data Input. The status of the automatic input
switchover is displayed in the Sel. Audio Input line.
The peak deviation and the MPX power during the last second are also displayed.

Note The status LED at the end of the Sel. Audio Input line displays the status of the currently
active input, i.e. the input being used, and corresponds to the NO INPUT LED on the exciter
front panel. Interference is indicated in the form of a warning (yellow) or fault (red), depend-
ing on the settings for the input automatics.

Note An entry in the context menu (Menu key) can be used to reset an exciter fault without hav-
ing to change menus.

Display Description

RF RF output indication:
Off (gray)
There is no RF level at the exciter output since the RF output is not
enabled ("manually" disabled)
On (green)
The RF level at the exciter output is OK
Fault (red)
There is no RF level at the exciter output even though the RF output
is enabled

3562.0908.72 - 5.63 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Display Description

Mainboard Mainboard status summary (detailed information in the Mainboard sub-


menu):
OK (green)
Mainboard functioning normally
Warning (yellow)
At least one monitored parameter is out of tolerance, but the instru-
ment is operating in compliance with data sheet specifications
Error (red)
At least one monitored parameter is out of tolerance, and the instru-
ment is no longer operating correctly

Audio Ch1 Status of channel 1 (primary audio input):


(the input type is defined in the Input > Automatic Input menu window)
OK (green)
Channel 1 is operating normally.
One Ch. Not OK (yellow)
In the case of modulation with stereo or with mono L+R, this status is
displayed if only one of the two feeds for left and right is operating
normally but the other feed is subject to interference.
Not OK (yellow)
Channel 1 has failed completely.

Audio Ch2 Status of channel 2 (secondary audio input = standby):


(the input type is defined in the Input > Automatic Input menu window)
OK (green)
Channel 2 is operating normally.
One Ch. Not OK (yellow)
In the case of modulation with stereo or with mono L+R, this status is
displayed if only one of the two feeds for left and right is operating
normally but the other feed is subject to interference.
Not OK (yellow)
Channel 2 has failed completely
Not used (gray)
No standby input has been defined.

Data Input Data inputs status:


OK (green)
All data inputs are operating normally or are switched off.
Warning (yellow)
At least one data input is faulty.

Output Open Status commanded by the R&S NetCCU800:


Output Connected (green)
Cable connection to the amplifiers is complete.
Output Open (red)
All amplifiers report no input signal; there is probably a break in the
cable at the RF output (on the exciter).

Local Local mode or remote mode:


(when operating with a R&S NetCCU800, the exciter automatically takes
on the appropriate status from the R&S NetCCU800)
No (gray)
Remote mode: the R&S NetCCU800 display and the web browser
can be used only to read the exciter parameters.
Yes (yellow)
Local mode: the R&S NetCCU800 display and the web browser can
be used to read and set the exciter parameters (full access).

3562.0908.72 - 5.64 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Display Description

Interlock Status commanded by the R&S NetCCU800:


No (gray)
RF loop closed
Yes (yellow)
RF loop not closed

Mute Internal block on exciter RF output:


No (gray)
The RF output of the exciter is not disabled (normal status)
Yes (yellow)
The RF output of the exciter is internally disabled (when the RF loop
is open or when changing frequency)

Fan1 / Fan2 Fan status:


OK (green)
Fan operating normally
Not OK (yellow)
Fan too slow or completely failed

Ext. Ref. External reference source status:


Off (gray)
No external reference connected; internal TCXO used
OK (green)
External reference frequency present and OK.
Not OK (yellow)
External reference frequency not present and not OK.

Sel. Audio Input Status of currently active input (i.e. the input being used)
(for details see "Input > Automatic Input Menu Window")

The following statuses are displayed:


Type of audio input and stereo mode
(e.g. AF Stereo or MPX Inp2)
Switch setting (of selected channel): Ch.1 or Ch.2
Status of the active channel with the following statuses:
The status reporting corresponds to the NO INPUT LED on the
exciter front panel.
OK (green): channel operating correctly
Warning (yellow): channel is subject to interference: no switchover
Error (red): channel is subject to interference: if necessary system
switches over to another exciter.

Deviation Indication of the peak deviation in kHz at the output during the last sec-
ond

Mod Power Indication of the modulation power in dBr at the output during the last
second

Additional details

Select a status to query the details.

3562.0908.72 - 5.65 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

3.2.3 Status > Mainboard Menu Window


The Mainboard menu window can be used to query details of the hardware status in order
to determine causes of errors more precisely.

Display Description

RF Unit Mainboard analog RF section status:


No Error (green)
Error-free
Error (red)
The RF section is defective and must be exchanged.

Supply Unit Power supply status:


No Error (green)
Error-free
Error (red)
At least one of the monitored voltages is out of tolerance, and the
instrument must be exchanged.

FPGA Loaded Indicates whether the FPGA was correctly loaded:


FPGA loaded (green)
Error-free
FPGA not loaded (red)
Signal processing is not operating; if appropriate check the CF card,
otherwise exchange the instrument.

3562.0908.72 - 5.66 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Display Description

EEPROM Module data consistency:


No Error (green)
Error-free
Error (red)
The CRC check on EPROM readout returned an error; the instrument
is not operating correctly in certain circumstances and should be
exchanged.

Main PLL / UPC PLL / RF section PLL status:


CLK PLL Locked (green)
Unlocked (yellow)

If a PLL is permanently unlocked, there is a fault on the RF section.

CF Card Indicates whether the built-in CF card was able to read the files cor-
rectly:
No Error (green)
Error-free
Error (red)
The data on the CF card is corrupted. The card must be reformatted
or exchanged. Please contact R&S Service.

Temperature Indicates the temperature of the internal test point:


OK (green)
Temperature below warning threshold
High (yellow)
The instrument is too warm and should not be operated permanently
at this temperature. Check the fan on the exciter or transmitter.
Fault (red)
The temperature is too high. The transmitter should be switched off to
avoid permanent damage.

12V Fans Indicates the power supply to the internal fan

Possible causes of error:


Short-circuit in a fan
Fault in the power supply (may be exchanged separately)
Break in the cable between mainboard and power supply

12V Rack Ctrl. The rack controller is supplied with an auxiliary voltage via connection
TX (X6B) if the dedicated auxiliary power supply has failed. The deliv-
ered voltage can be read out at this point.

Possible causes of error:


Short-circuit on the rack controller
In this case the voltage returns to the correct value (about 11.93 V) if
the connection to the rack controller (X6B) is broken.
Fault in the mainboard power supply
In this case the mainboard must be exchanged.

3562.0908.72 - 5.67 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

3.2.4 Status > Analog Status Menu Window

This window shows the status for each of the analog inputs that is currently connected.
They are as follows:

AF Left = Input 2, Analog Left


AF Right = Input 1, Analog Right
MPX = Input 2 or Input 3 (depending on the switch setting)
AUX1 = Data input, RDS
AUX2 = Data input, SCA2
AUX3 = Data input, SCA3

Display Description

Nominal Status display for the set nominal input amplitude

Current Display of the peak value for the input amplitude during the last second;
shown as a percentage of the nominal input amplitude and as an abso-
lute value in dB

Status Display of the current status; the possibilities are as follows:


Off (gray)
The input is not active.
OK (green)
Input is active and input amplitude is OK
Clipped (yellow)
Input is active and input amplitude is too high; A/D converter is over-
driven
Too Low (yellow)
Input is active but input amplitude is below monitoring threshold

Note The statuses OK and Too Low are determined using the algorithm described in the section
"Signal Monitoring, Analog Inputs".
Although the Clipped status is analyzed and displayed in this menu, it has no effect on the
status of the input channel concerned. This means that even though an overdriven input
leads to a general warning, the corresponding input channel (Status > Overview menu
window) is still OK and is not switched over to a standby channel if one is available.

3562.0908.72 - 5.68 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Note The context menu (Menu key) contains two entries, AF Setup and Data Setup, for directly
calling menu windows Input > Analog Input or Input > Data Input. These menu windows
can be used to change the settings for the inputs displayed in each case. The Back key
takes you back to the original menu.

3.2.5 Status > Digital Status Menu Window

Status of the digital signal at the AES/EBU input

The following indications return the status of the digital signal, i.e. the audio content. There
are separate indications for the left and right channels.

Note The statuses OK and Too Low are determined using the algorithm described in the section
"Signal Monitoring, Analog Inputs".

Display Description

Nominal Status display for the set nominal input amplitude

Current Display of the peak value for the input amplitude during the last second;
shown as a percentage of the nominal input amplitude and as an abso-
lute level in dBFs

State Display of the current status; the possibilities are as follows:


Off (gray)
The input is not active.
OK (green)
Input is active and input amplitude is OK.
Level too Low (yellow)
Input is active but input amplitude is below monitoring threshold.

Status of the AES receiver

In addition, certain status information for the AES receiver is displayed.

3562.0908.72 - 5.69 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Display Description

Sample Rate Indication of the detected audio signal sampling rate; the receiver can
decode signals with sampling rates between 32 kHz and 192 kHz per
channel

Preemphasis Indicates whether the receiver has detected a preemphasis in the AES
data stream. This information is taken from the status bits in the AES
channel.

Audio Indicates whether the receiver has detected audio content in the AES
data stream. This information is taken from the AES channel status bits.

Non-PCM Indicates whether the data stream contains proper audio samples. Non-
PCM audio streams in accordance with the Dolby specification "AC-3
Data Stream in IEC 60958 Interface" cannot be processed by the sys-
tem.

The following states are possible:


Off (gray)
The input is not active.
Audio (green)
Input is active and signal in accordance with AES3, IEC 60958.
Non-PCM Audio (yellow)
Input is active and signal cannot be processed

Ch State Valid Indicates whether the decoded status reporting of the AES frequency
channel is valid

The following states are possible:


Off (gray)
The input is not active.
Status Valid (green)
The input is active, the AES channel status is valid.
Status Not Valid (yellow)
The indicated receiver status is not valid.
The input is marked as defective and switched over if necessary.

Ch State CRC Indicates whether the receiver has detected CRC errors in the AES
channel status bits

Parity/Biphase Indicates whether the receiver has detected an error in the AES/EBU
frame

The following states are possible:


Off (gray)
The input is not active.
OK (green)
Input is active and there are no errors.
Parity or Biphase Error (red)
Input is active but a parity or biphase error occurred.
The input is marked as defective and switched over if necessary.

3562.0908.72 - 5.70 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Display Description

Clock Indicates whether the receiver has detected a clock signal

The following states are possible:


Off (gray)
The input is not active.
OK (green)
Input is active and clock is available.
No Clock (yellow)
Input is active and clock is not available.
The input is marked as defective and switched over if necessary.

Note The statuses CH State Valid, Parity/Biphase and Clock give rise to a switchover to the
standby channel, if one is available. When the error is detected, the input level is set at "Too
Low" in order to avoid a switchover. For this reason the signal must be restored at least for
the duration of the defined On time (see "Input > Digital Input Menu Window" ) in order for
the channel to be marked as "OK" again.

Note The context menu (Menu key) contains the entry Setup for directly calling the Input > Dig-
ital Audio menu window . This menu window can be used to change the settings for the
inputs displayed. The Back key takes you back to the original menu.

3.3 Logbook Menu

The logbook is used to record state changes (events) affecting the exciter.

The menu window

The Logbook menu leads to the following menu windows:

Summary: Complete logbook with all recorded data


Status: Partial logbook with recorded status changes
Warning: Partial logbook with recorded occurrences of warnings
Fault: Partial logbook with recorded occurrences and resets of error messages

3562.0908.72 - 5.71 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

3.3.1 Logbook > Summary/Status/Warning/Fault Menu Window

The complete logbook and the partial logbooks are uniformly structured. The messages are
numbered sequentially and contain the following information:

Indicator for the occurrence or disappearance of an event (only for warnings or sta-
tus messages)
Message: Brief description of the event
Time: Time of day of the event
Date: Date of the event

The colored arrows in the second column have the following meanings:

Green: Status message


Yellow: Warning
Red: Fault

3.3.2 Logbook Context Menu


Additional context functions are available in the menu windows for the complete logbook
and the partial logbooks:

Function Description

Clear logbook Clears all entries in the current logbook. Note that it is not possible to
clear individual entries.

When you clear the complete logbook, the partial logbooks are also
cleared.

When you clear the complete logbook or the error logbook, all faults are
reset. If a fault is still present, it is indicated and again entered in the log-
book.

3562.0908.72 - 5.72 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Function Description

Restore logbook Restores the cleared entries in the current logbook.

When you restore the complete logbook, the partial logbooks are also
restored.

3.3.3 Overview of Logbook Messages


The following messages can be generated by the exciter:

Message Category Description

ADC +12 V PS-B Warning Operating voltage supply interrupted for the fans; it might be necessary
to exchange the power supply

ADC +12 V Rack Warning The auxiliary voltage supply for the rack controller is defective. If the
voltage supply for the rack controller fails, no backup through the exciter
is available; the exciter should be exchanged as a precaution

Parity/Biphase Error Warning Parity or biphase error in incoming AES/EBU signal

AES No CLK Warning Clock synchronization to AES signal is not possible

AES State Not Valid Warning Some AES channel status bits invalid; clock information from receiver
chip invalid

AES-L Level Warning Digital level AES left is below the defined threshold

AES-R Level Warning Digital level AES right is below the defined threshold

AF-L Clip Warning Level at left analog input is too high; A/D converter is overdriven

AF-L Level Warning The level at the left analog input is below the defined threshold

AF-R Clip Warning Level at right analog input is too high; A/D converter is overdriven

AF-R Level Warning The level at the right analog input is below the defined threshold

AUX1 Clip Warning Level at AUX1 input is too high; A/D converter is overdriven

AUX1 Level Warning The level at the AUX1 input is below the defined threshold

AUX2 Clip Warning Level at AUX2 input is too high; A/D converter is overdriven

AUX2 Level Warning The level at the AUX2 input is below the defined threshold

AUX3 Clip Warning Level at AUX3 input is too high; A/D converter is overdriven

AUX3 Level Warning The level at the AUX3 input is below the defined threshold

FAN 1 Warning Fan 1 is not functioning properly and should be exchanged (see the
"Maintenance" chapter)

FAN 2 Warning Fan 2 is not functioning properly and should be exchanged (see the
"Maintenance" chapter)

Freq.Change Status The user carried out a frequency change

HW CF Card Fault The built-in CF card is defective and must be exchanged

HW EEPROM Fault It is no longer possible to read the EEPROM on the mainboard and the
calibration data are not available; the device is defective and must be
exchanged

HW Mainboard Fault Hardware general fault; the device is defective and must be exchanged

3562.0908.72 - 5.73 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Message Category Description

Local Status Exciter in local mode

MPX Clip Warning Level at MPX input is too high; A/D converter is overdriven

MPX Level Warning The level at the MPX input is below the defined threshold

Mute Status RF output signal was suppressed internally; this warning is generated
automatically during a frequency change or if the RF loop is interrupted

No FPGA Fault The FPGA could not be loaded

No Input Warning The active audio input is defective


Fault If the Report Type (Input > Automatic Input menu window) is set to Fault,
a fault is also generated

Power Supply Fault The power supply on the mainboard is faulty; the device is defective and
must be exchanged; check for external short-circuit on rack controller if
necessary (see "Status > Mainboard Menu Window")

Reboot Status Exciter rebooted

Ref Fail Warning Failure of external reference frequency

RF Fail Fault No RF output signal present; the device is defective and must be
exchanged

RF On Status RF output signal present

RF Unit fault Fault RF unit on the mainboard is defective; the device must be exchanged

Sum fault Fault General fault

Sum warning Warning General warning

Temp. fault Fault Temperature on mainboard excessive; device switches off

Temp. too high Warning Temperature on the mainboard is excessive

Test Mode Warning The device is in test mode; this mode is available only to R&S service
personnel

ON State Status RF On/Off has been commanded

No CCU Comm Status The exciter has no connection to the R&S NetCCU800

Output Open Fault Commanded by the R&S NetCCU800: all amplifiers are without an input
signal; there is probably a break at the exciter output

Main PLL Unlock Warning The main PLL has not locked
(if the status persists, RF Unit Fault is triggered)

UPC PLL Unlock Warning The UPC PLL has not locked
(if the status persists, RF Unit Fault is triggered)

ClK PLL Unlock Warning The Clk PLL has not locked
(if the status persists, RF Unit Fault is triggered)

Inp Ch1 not OK Warning Channel 1 (primary audio input) is faulty

Inp Ch2 not OK Warning Channel 2 (secondary audio input = standby) is faulty

Inp Ch1 active Status Channel 1 (primary audio input) is active

Inp Ch2 active Status Channel 2 (primary audio input) is active

Auto Inp Sel On Status Preselection is set to Automatic

3562.0908.72 - 5.74 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

3.4 Setup Menu

The menu windows described below are used to enter the default settings for device man-
agement.

3.4.1 Setup > Ethernet Menu Window

Setting item Description

Front Ethernet Settings for the Ethernet interface on the front panel; this interface
enables the R&S SU800 to be operated with the aid of a web browser,
even without a R&S NetCCU800 .

IP Address IP address (default setting: 192.168.57.253)

Subnet Mask Subnet mask (default setting: 255.255.255.0)

MAC MAC address of the network card

Display Description

Rear Ethernet Indications for the Ethernet interface on the rear panel; the values can-
not be changed, since this interface is reserved for the R&S
NetCCU800.

IP Address IP address
Exciter A: 192.168.058.253 (patch cable)
Exciter A: 192.168.058.252 (crossover cable)

Subnet Mask Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

MAC MAC address of the network card

3562.0908.72 - 5.75 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

3.4.2 Setup > Date/Time Menu Window


This menu window can be used to set the system time used in the exciter for logbook en-
tries. The time is stored on a real time clock (RTC) chip. The RTC is buffered by a capacitor,
so that in the event of an AC supply failure the time remains stored for up to six weeks.

Note All times should be synchronized in the transmitter so that all simultaneous events are
logged with the same system time. For this reason the time in the exciter is normally set by
the R&S NetCCU800. The settings in the menu window concerned therefore cannot be ed-
ited when a R&S NetCCU800 is connected.

Setting item Description

Date Current date

Time Current time

3.5 Input Menu

The menu windows in the Input menu are used to set the default parameters for input signal
processing. The behavior of the automatic input switchover and the choice of modulation
input are also set from here.

The menu windows

The Input menu leads to the following menu windows:

Analog Audio: For setting the analog inputs and the MPX input
Digital Audio: For setting the digital input (AES/EBU)
Data Input: For setting data inputs (RDS, SCA)
Automatic Input: For configuring input automatics

3562.0908.72 - 5.76 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

3.5.1 Input > Analog Audio Menu Window

The settings for Analog L/R and MPX can be entered separately. The settings for Analog L/
R apply both to the left stereo channel (input 2) and the right stereo channel (input 1). The
settings for MPX apply for a feed via input 2 as well as for a feed via input 3.

Setting item Description

Impedance Selection of the input impedance; possible settings:


600 Ohm
>2 kOhm

Level Setting the nominal input amplitude


Value range (analog): -6 dBu through +12 dBu (default setting +6 dBu)
Value range (MPX): -1 dBu through +16 dBu (default setting +6 dBu)

Threshold Setting for the input amplitude threshold for monitoring

The setting can be entered in two ways:


as a percentage of the nominal input amplitude
in the value range: 2% through 80% (default setting 5%)
as an absolute value in dBu

in a value range dependent on the absolute level, corresponding to


input as a percentage

Display Description

On-Time If the input amplitude is continuously above the threshold during the set
time interval On-Time, the input is considered to be OK.
Value range: 1 s through 6000 s (default setting 5 s)

Off-Time If the input amplitude is continuously below the threshold during the set
time interval Off-Time, the input is considered not to be OK.
Value range: 1 s through 6000 s (default setting 5 s)

3562.0908.72 - 5.77 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

3.5.1.1 Signal Monitoring at Analog Inputs

Nominal input amplitude

The nominal input amplitude is the signal amplitude (500 Hz sinusoidal signal) that produc-
es 100 % of the set nominal deviation at the output of the FM modulator. The analog level
regulators on the input side are set so that there is still 9 dB headroom on the A/D converter
at this amplitude in the case of the audio inputs and 6 dB headroom in the case of the data
inputs.

Permissible input amplitude

If the signal overdrives the FM modulator, the internal limiter will limit the frequency modu-
lated (FM) signal (assuming the limiter is activated), as soon as its threshold is reached.
The nominal input amplitude then generates the nominal deviation (for a 500 Hz sinewave).

If the signal is greater than around 281% of the nominal input amplitude, the A/D converters
are already overdriven and the signal will be clipped. The Clipped warning is then dis-
played.

Note The Clipped warning is displayed in the detailed status only (Status > Analog Status
menu window). It also generates a general warning for the exciter. However, it has no effect
on the status of the input channel, that is, the corresponding input (Ch1 or Ch2) is still indi-
cated as OK and there is no automatic switchover.

Current input amplitude

The peak value of the signal amplitude is sampled and evaluated every 10 ms. If the peak
value drops below the defined Threshold, a timer is started. The timer is reset as soon as
the signal rises back above the threshold. However, if the timer reaches the Off-Time error
limit, a warning is displayed. The warning remains until the signal amplitude is back above
the threshold. At that point a timer is also started which works in the same manner. The
warning disappears when the timer reaches the set time interval On-Time.

Note Brief peaks up to 50 ms long are suppressed by the control logic, i.e. the signal must be
above or below the threshold for at least 50 ms for the corresponding timer to be started or
stopped. This prevents undesired indications from being triggered by brief signal peaks.

Note By nature, any monitoring of analog signals must be based on the current input level; how-
ever, this is also highly dependent on the content of the transmitted signal. If longer pauses
are possible, e.g. in a program of classical music, we recommend increasing the Off-Time
value accordingly in order to avoid indications. Conversely, you can shorten the time if you
are certain that no longer pauses will occur in the program.

3562.0908.72 - 5.78 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

3.5.2 Input > Digital Audio Menu Window

Setting item Description

Digital Level For setting the nominal digital input amplitude; 0 dBFs corresponds to
full-scale value of the digital signal
Value range: -12 dBFs through 0 dBFs (default setting -3 dBFs)

Threshold Setting for the digital input amplitude threshold for monitoring

The setting can be entered in two ways:


as a percentage of the nominal input amplitude
in the value range: 2% through 80% (default setting 5%)
as an absolute value in dBFs
in a value range dependent on the absolute level, corresponding to
input as a percentage

On-Time If the input amplitude is continuously above the threshold during the set
time interval On-Time, the input is considered to be OK.
Value range: 1 s through 6000 s (default setting 5 s)

Off-Time If the input amplitude is continuously below the threshold during the set
time interval Off-Time, the input is considered not to be OK.
Value range: 1 s through 6000 s (default setting 5 s)

3.5.2.1 Signal Monitoring at Digital Input

Note The levels specified here refer to the digital level, i.e. the level of the audio samples in the
AES/EBU signal. The monitoring also takes place at this level for AES/EBU, in addition to
additional status monitoring. This makes it possible to also detect errors in the feed if an
upstream device is only generating an empty (but still valid) AES/EBU signal.

Nominal digital input amplitude

The nominal digital input amplitude is the signal amplitude (500 Hz sinusoidal signal) that
produces 100% of the set nominal deviation at the output of the FM modulator.

3562.0908.72 - 5.79 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Permissible digital input amplitude

Since the signal is already in digital format with AES/EBU, any headroom must be taken
into account accordingly.

Current digital input amplitude

The digital signal amplitude is monitored in the same manner as the analog inputs (see the
section "Signal Monitoring, Analog Inputs").

3.5.3 Input > Data Input Menu Window

The settings can be made separately for each of the three data inputs.

Setting item Description

Input Setting the nominal input amplitude


Value range: -18 dBu through -7 dBu (default setting -14 dBu)

Deviation Setting for the frequency deviation caused by the nominal input level
Value range: 2 kHz through 10 kHz (default setting 4 kHz)

Active Activation of the corresponding input


Selection: On/Off

Threshold Setting for the input amplitude threshold for monitoring

The setting can be entered in two ways:


as a percentage of the nominal input amplitude
in the value range: 2% through 80% (default setting 5%)
as an absolute value in dBu
in a value range dependent on the absolute level, corresponding to
input as a percentage

On-Time If the input amplitude is continuously above the threshold during the set
time interval On-Time, the input is considered to be OK.
Value range: 1 s through 6000 s (default setting 5 s)

3562.0908.72 - 5.80 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Setting item Description

Off-Time If the input amplitude is continuously below the threshold during the set
time interval Off-Time, the input is considered not to be OK.
Value range: 1 s through 6000 s (default setting 5 s)

3.5.3.1 Signal Monitoring

The same rules apply as described in the section "Signal Monitoring, Analog Inputs".

3.5.4 Input > Automatic Input Menu Window

Setting item Description

Operating Mode For setting and displaying audio inputs and stereo mode

Two different modulation types can be preselected. It is possible to


switch between them manually or automatically.

State Displays the status of the channel concerned

Channel 1 For setting the audio input and stereo mode for channel 1 a)
(Primary)
Possible selections:
AF Mono L
AF Mono R
AF Mono (L+R)/2
AF Stereo
AES Mono L
AES Mono R
AES Mono (L+R)/2
AES Stereo
MPX Inp2
MPX Inp3

3562.0908.72 - 5.81 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Setting item Description

State Status of channel 1 (primary audio input):


OK (green)
Channel 1 is operating normally.
One Ch. Not OK (yellow)
In the case of modulation with stereo or with mono L+R, this status is
displayed if only one of the two feeds for left and right is operating
normally but the other feed is subject to interference.
Not OK (yellow)
Channel 1 has failed completely.

Channel 2 For setting the audio input and stereo mode for channel 2 b)
(Secondary)
Possible selections:
AF Mono L
AF Mono R
AF Mono (L+R)/2
AF Stereo
AES Mono L
AES Mono R
AES Mono (L+R)/2
AES Stereo
MPX Inp2
MPX Inp3
Not Used

State Status of channel 2 (secondary audio input = standby):


OK (green)
Channel 2 is operating normally.
One Ch. Not OK (yellow)
In the case of modulation with stereo or with mono L+R, this status is
displayed if only one of the two channels is operating normally but the
other channel is subject to interference.
Not OK (yellow)
Channel 2 has failed completely.
Not used (gray)
No standby input has been defined.

Selection For selecting the active channel

Possible selections:
Ch.1
Ch.2
Auto (automatic input selection): The best available channel is
selected according to the following priority:
1.) Ch.1 is OK. switch to Ch.1
2.) Ch.2 is OK. switch to Ch.2
3.) In Ch.1 there is one channel OK. switch to Ch.1
4.) In Ch.2 there is one channel OK. switch to Ch.2
5.) Switch to Ch.1

State Displays the active channel: Ch.1 or Ch.2

3562.0908.72 - 5.82 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Setting item Description

Error Reporting For setting the behavior if the active channel is faulty

By default only the warning "No Input" is created. It may however be


preferred for the exciter to generate a fault message. In this case the
exciter standby would then be switched over to the other exciter.

This is good practice when, for example, there are two separate MPX
feeds. In this case Exciter A can be switched permanently to MPX Inp.2
and Exciter B can be switched permanently to MPX Inp3. In this case
the indicated selection is Ch.1.

Report Type Warning


The active channel creates only the warning "No Input".
Fault
The active channel also generatesthe fault message "No Input".
When the channel is OK again, the defect is automatically reset.

Fail Delay For setting a time interval after which, in the event of a "No Input" warn-
ing, the "No Input" fault message also has to be generated

Only active when Report Type is set to Fault.

a) Since switchovers are allowed for certain combinations only, the number of options offered for selection is
limited depending on the settings for channel 2. To display all possible choices, channel 2 (secondary) must
be set to "Not Used".
b) Since switchovers are allowed for certain combinations only, the number of options offered for selection is
limited depending on the settings for channel 1.

3.5.4.1 Audio Input and Stereo Mode

Input types

The exciter can basically process three different signal feeds:

Analog: AF signal separately for the left and/or right channel


MPX: Analog Left or MPX
Digital: AES/EBU or MPX

Connection to the transmitter input

The hardware was designed to allow simultaneous connection of two of the three possible
input types. The relationships are as follows:

Input 1: Analog Right


Input 2: Analog Left or MPX
Input 3: AES/EBU or MPX

3562.0908.72 - 5.83 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Operating mode

Depending on what is needed, you can choose between the following modes: Mono Left,
Mono Right, Mono (Left+Right)/2 and Stereo.

If MPX is chosen, this selection is not available since the mode is predetermined by the in-
coming signal. This signal is processed directly and the internal stereo coder is skipped.

3.6 Modulation Menu

The Modulation menu window is used to set a number of additional parameters for the in-
tegrated stereo coder.

Setting item Description

Pilot tone Setting of the deviation produced by the pilot tone for stereo
Value range: 2 kHz through 10 kHz (default setting 7 kHz)

Active (Pilot tone) Switches the pilot tone on and off (active only in stereo mode; the pilot
tone is always off in mono mode)

Preemphasis Selection of the signal preemphasis: 50 s (default setting) or 75 s

Active (Preemphasis) For switching preemphasis on or off (with MPX mode still inactive)

Display Description

Actual Modulation Displays the current modulation format setting


(the modulation format is defined in the Input > Automatic Input menu
window)

Tip: The context menu (Menu key) contains the entry Mod. Select for
directly calling the Input > Automatic Input menu window. The Back
key takes you back to the original menu.

3562.0908.72 - 5.84 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

3.7 Deviation/Limiter Menu

The Deviation/Limiter menu window is used to set the nominal deviation and parameters
for the limiter. Current status values are also displayed.

Setting item/display Description

Nominal Deviation Sets the nominal deviation; a 500 Hz sinewave FM signal at nominal
level is modulated with this deviation
Value range: 40 kHz through 150 kHz (default setting 40 kHz)

The nominal level is set in the Input > Analog Input menu for the analog
inputs and/or in the Input >Digital Input menu for the AES/EBU input.

Limiter Deviation

Threshold Sets the threshold for automatic deviation limitation


Value range: 40 kHz through 150 kHz (default setting 75 kHz)

Active Switches the deviation limiter on or off (default = ON).

Limiter MPX Power

Threshold Sets the threshold for automatic MPX power limitation


Value range: -5.0 through +5.0 dBr (default setting 0 dBr)

Active Switches the MPX power limiter on or off (default = ON).

Display a) Description

Actual Deviation Displays the currently measured deviation

Actual MPX Power Displays the currently measured MPX power

Clipped Deviation Displays the greatest difference between the clipper input and output
during the last second

3562.0908.72 - 5.85 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Display a) Description

Limiter Activity Displays the limiter strength

This display gives an approximate measure of how strongly the limiter is


affecting the signal. Value range: 0.0% (= no effect) through 100%

a) The measured values are updated once per second.

3.7.1 Deviation and MPX Limiter


The limiter is able to monitor both peak deviation and average modulation power (to ITU-R
SM 1268-1). The modulation power is defined in ITU-R SM 1268-1 as follows:

The modulation power is a floating average value for the last 60 s. It therefore takes 60 s
from powering up before the correct modulation power is measured.

If one or both limiters are activated, the limiter monitors the signal and readjusts the audio
signal as necessary. Other components in the MPX signal, such as the pilot and RDS, are
not affected.

Deviation limiter

In order to keep to total harmonic distortion low and enable the simultaneous use of external
sound processors, the limiter operates in two stages:

Stage 1: Audio level controller


Stage 2: MPX peak clipper

The audio level controller calculates the theoretical deviation when the MPX peak clipper is
inactive. If this value exceeds the deviation limiter threshold for longer than 5 seconds, the
audio signal is gradually attenuated until the average value is more than 5 second below
the threshold.

Short peaks are clipped by the MPX peak clipper. Compared to a pure clipper, this mecha-
nism significantly reduces the total harmonic distortion if the input signal is permanently too
large.

It is also possible to use external sound processors, since the audio signal is not affected
in the event of transient out-of-limit conditions, and the clipper ensures compliance with lo-
cal regulations. The external processor then ensures that the MPX signal is always below
the threshold.

Note In MPX mode (input 2 or input 3) only the MPX peak clipper operates.

3562.0908.72 - 5.86 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Modulation power limiter (MPX power limiter)

According to the ITU recommendation, the average modulation power is measured contin-
uously for a period of 60 seconds. During that time it must not exceed a certain value, usu-
ally 0 dBr. This means that the modulation power would always exceed this value over a
shorter period than 60 seconds.

The MPX power limiter is therefore in fact a controller rather than a limiter. It estimates the
volume trend in the audio signal and readjusts the gain on the audio inputs accordingly. The
algorithm has also been designed to distinguish between sudden peaks or notches and
longer changes in volume (e.g. a change from music to speech). This prevents the "pump
effect" that would otherwise result in the case of rhythmical changes in volume, such as
when music continuously alternates between loud and soft, and enables an announcer to
speak over it.

Note In MPX mode (input 2 or input 3) the MPX power limiter is always deactivated. In this case
the external source must ensure compliance with the ITU recommendation.

3.8 RF Menu

You can use the RF menu to set the output frequency and also to enter settings for the ref-
erence clock.

Setting item Description

RF Output Switches the RF output on or off

This setting is normally carried out by the transmitter control unit, i.e. in
the R&S NetCCU800. Therefore if the exciter detects a connection to
the R&S NetCCU800, the value is set to "read only".

Frequency Setting for the output frequency


Value range: 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
Step size: 0.01 MHz

3562.0908.72 - 5.87 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Setting item Description

Clock Reference Sets the reference for the internal oscillator


Possible selections:
Internal (the built-in TCXO is used; default setting)
External PPS (one pulse per second from an external source;
optional)
External 10 MHz (a 10 MHz clock from an external source; optional)

TCXO Trim Value For adjusting the internal TCXO a)


Value range: -100 % through +100 %
Step size: 0.01 %

a) The value is sent straight to the hardware, i.e. there is no need to confirm the entry with OK. By simulta-
neously measuring the output frequency, the effect of the setting can be monitored straight away. The value
is permanently saved when the setting has stayed unchanged for around 30 seconds.

Display Description

Ext. Ref. State Status indication of the external oscillator reference


Options:
Off (the internal TCXO is used)
OK (the reference signal is present)
Not OK (the reference signal is not present or is defective)

Ext. Ref. Locked Displays the lock in status of the oscillator reference
Options:
Off (the internal TCXO is used)
Locked (the reference signal is locked in and being used)
Not Locked (the reference signal is not locked in and is not being
used)

3.9 Device Info Menu

The menu windows under Device Info contain the electronic type plates for the exciter as a
whole as well as for the individual modules or elements in the exciter:

Device (complete device)


Mainboard (modules)
Boot flash (BIOS version)

The information saved here is used for troubleshooting purposes. In case servicing is re-
quired, this information allows you to precisely identify the defective component and order
a replacement.

3562.0908.72 - 5.88 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

3.9.1 Device Info > Device Menu Window

Display Explanation

Part Number Stock number

Variant Device variant

Product index Product modification index

Serial Number Serial number

Product Date Date of production

SW/FW Number Stock number of the software/firmware package

SW/FW Version Version number of the software/firmware package

FPGA FW Version Version number of the FPGA firmware


(for your information only the FPGA firmware is part of the software/
firmware package)

OS Version Version number of the internal operating system


(for your information only the operating system is part of the software/
firmware package)

3562.0908.72 - 5.89 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

3.9.2 Device Info > Mainboard Menu Window

Display Description

Part Number Stock number

Variant Device model

Product index Product modification index

Serial Number Serial number

Product Date Date of production

Operating hours Number of operating hours

Power up cycles Number of times device has been switched on/off

3.9.3 Device Info > Boot Flash Menu Window

3562.0908.72 - 5.90 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Display Explanation

Bootload Number Stock number of the boot loader

Bootload Version Version of the boot loader

Bootprog Number Stock number of the boot program

Bootprog Version Version of the boot program

3562.0908.72 - 5.91 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

4 Menus of Outputstage A/B

The term "output stage" refers to the entire set of RF amplifiers. There can be anything from
just one rack and one amplifier to a large number of racks with many amplifiers.

You can use the Output Stage A/B menus to operate and configure the transmitter rack and
amplifiers and to call up information.

Note The Output Stage B menus and menu windows are identical to the Output Stage A menus
and menu windows.

4.1 Overview of Outputstage A/B Menus

Outputstage A menu structure

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Status

OS Status

Rack Status

Rack X

Rack Controller

Amplifier x (x = 1 to
10)

Logbook

Summary

Status

Warning

3562.0908.72 - 5.92 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Outputstage A menu structure

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Fault

Output Power

Setup

OS Setup

Measure Values

Rack Measure Values

Rack X

Rack Controller

Amplifier x

Device Info

Rack X

Rack Controller

Amplifier x (x = 1 to
10)

4.2 Status Menu

The Status menu provides an overview of faults, warnings and status messages relating to
the individual components of the output stage(s).

4.2.1 OS Status Menu Window


Outputstage A > Status > OS Status

The OS Status menu window provides an overview of the transmitter rack's status.

3562.0908.72 - 5.93 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

The following table explains the meaning of the individual display fields:

Display Explanation

RF Fail Red: Antenna output power is below the set fault limit

Reflection Red: Antenna reflected power is above the set fault limit

AC Red: Power supply fault (phase failure)

Communication Red: Communication to the output stage has been interrupted

Cooling Red: There is a fault in the cooling system

RF Warning Yellow: Antenna output power is below the set warning limit

Reflection Yellow: Antenna reflected power is below the set warning limit

Rack Yellow: There is a fault at at least one transmitter rack

Cooling Yellow: There is a fault in the cooling system

Fault Red: Sum message "Fault" for output stage

Warning Yellow: Sum message "Warning" for output stage

No Input No input signal sent to the amplifiers

RF OK Green: Antenna output power is above the set warning limit

RF On Green: Antenna output power is above the set fault limit

3562.0908.72 - 5.94 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

4.2.2 Status/Rack Controller Menu Window


Outputstage A > Status > Rack Status > Rack x > Rack Controller

The Status/Rack Controller menu window provides status information about the rack con-
troller.

The following table explains the meaning of the individual display fields:

Display Explanation

Fault Red: Sum fault at least one fault at the rack controller or in one of its
lower-level modules (e.g. amplifier) is active.

Warning Yellow: Sum warning at least one warning at the rack controller or in
one of its lower-level modules (e.g. amplifier) is active.

Link OK Green: There is a communication link with the transmitter rack

Rack On Green: Rack is switched on

Cooling Fault Red: Sum fault in the cooling system

Extern Cooling Yellow: Fault in the external cooling system

Abs. 1 Fault Red: Fault message for temperature at absorber 1

Abs. 2 Fault Red: Fault message for temperature at absorber 2

AC Fault Red: AC power supply fault (three-phase current)

DC Fault Red: DC current supply fault (auxiliary voltage, alternating current)

Amplifier Fault Yellow: Sum fault at amplifiers

Temp. Fault Red: Transmitter rack temperature is above the set fault limit

Fan 1 Fault Yellow: Fault at fan 1

Fan 2 Fault Yellow: Fault at fan 2

3562.0908.72 - 5.95 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

4.3 Logbook Menu

You can use the Logbook menu to query status and fault messages about the output stage.

4.3.1 Logbook Menu Window


Outputstage A > Logbook

The menu windows of the Logbook provide an overview of the status, warning and fault
messages relating to output stage A/B.

Note You can call up logbook entries in the Summary, Status, Warning and Fault windows.

The following table explains the meaning of the columns:

Column Explanation

No Consecutive entry number

Message Message

Time Time at which the message was received

Date Date on which the message was received

The arrows in the second column have the following meaning:

Arrow direc-
Arrow color Explanation
tion

Up The event has just occurred.

Down The event:


- has disappeared
- is no longer present

Red Fault

3562.0908.72 - 5.96 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Arrow direc-
Arrow color Explanation
tion

Yellow Warning

Green Status OK

The output stage generates the following messages which can be used for tracing faults if
they occur:

Message Explanation

Absorber 1 Temp Absorber 1 has an overtemperature fault

Absorber 2 Temp Absorber 2 has an overtemperature fault

AC Fault Supply voltage network-side is not OK

AC Ok Amp Amplifier supply voltage primary-side is OK

Amp On Amplifier is ON

BIOS Updated Not used

Blower Amp Amplifier has a fan fault.

Cooling Fan 1 Fan 1 defective

Cooling Fan 2 Fan 2 defective

Cooling OST Rack cooling is not functioning correctly.

Cooling OST Output stage has a cooling fault.

Cooling Rack Rack has a cooling fault.

DC Ok Amp Amplifier supply voltage secondary-side is OK

Ext. Cooling Fault in the external cooling system

Ext. Cooling Rack Not for FM

Fans Fault in both fans on a rack

Link Amp Communication between amplifier and rack controller present

Link Rack Connection to the rack present

Local Rack is set to local operation.

No Communication No communication between R&S NetCCU800 and output stage.

No Connection Link between the R&S NetCCU800 and rack is faulty

No Input At least one input level is missing.

OK State Rack is OK.

3562.0908.72 - 5.97 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Message Explanation

On rack Rack is ON

On State Rack is switched on.

One FAN Rack is operating with just one fan; there is a pressure drop at fan
2
- only for transmitters with 2 internal fans
- otherwise inactive

Power Supply Auxiliary voltage supply unit is OK.

Rack Sum Fault Rack has a sum fault.

Reboot R&S NetCCU800 has rebooted.

Reboot Request Reset has been triggered on the R&S NetCCU800 (reboot).

Reduced RF Transmitter is operating with reduced power.

Reflection Antenna VSWR is too high.

Reflection Amp Amplifier has a reflection fault.

Reflection Fault There is a reflection fault

RF Fail Output power of the output stage is below the fault threshold

RF Fail Amp Amplifier cannot generate an output signal.

RF In Fail amp Amplifier has no (usable) input signal.

RF Ok Rack is OK.

RF On Rack is switched on.

RF Warning RF power is below the warning threshold.

Sum Fault There is a sum fault.

Sum Fault Amp Amplifier in the rack has a sum fault.

Sum Fault OST There is a sum fault in the rack

Sum Fault rack Rack has a sum fault.

Sum Warning There is a sum warning.

Sum Wng Amp Amplifier has a sum warning.

Sum Wng OST There is a sum warning in the rack

Sum Wng Rack Rack has a sum warning.

SW Updated Software of the rack controller has been updated

Temp Amp Amplifier has an overtemperature fault.

3562.0908.72 - 5.98 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Message Explanation

Temperature Cooling air temperatures are OK.

Transistor Amp Amplifier has a transistor fault.

4.4 Output Power Menu

You can use the Output Power menu to view the output power of the transmitter (STX, DD)
or of the selected output stage (PPA, APA) and to set the associated nominal value.

4.4.1 Output Power Menu Window


Outputstage A > Output Power

In the Output Power menu window you can set the output power of the transmitter.

The following table explains the meaning of the individual settings:

Setting/display Explanation

Ref. Voltage Used to set the transmitter output power

Forward Power Displays the output power

4.5 Setup Menu

You use the Setup menu to open the OS Setup window.

3562.0908.72 - 5.99 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

4.5.1 OS Setup Menu Window


Outputstage A > Setup > OS Setup

In the OS Setup menu window you can make basic settings for the output stage.

The following table explains the meaning of the individual settings:

Setting item Typical Explanation

Racks per OS 1 Number of transmitter racks


Values: 1 - 10 (for FM - maximum 4)

Max. Outlet Temp. 65 C max. Maximum exhaust air temperature of transmitter


FM transmitter:
Toutmax = 65 C

Amplifier per Rack Number of amplifiers

RF Probes are at 1 In the APA configuration, the transmitter has additional


Rack test points for the output stages. Under this configuration
item you can specify the rack in which the test points are
installed (typ. rack 1).

4.6 Measure Values Menu

You can use the Measure Values menu to read off measurement values.

4.6.1 Measure Values/Rack Controller Menu Window


Outputstage A > Measure Values > Rack Measure Values > Rack x > Rack Controller

The Measure Values/Rack Controller menu window displays the intake and exhaust air
temperatures and the auxiliary voltage of the transmitter rack.

3562.0908.72 - 5.100 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

The following table explains the meaning of the fields:

Entry/display Description

Inlet Temperature Inlet temperature of the cooling medium (intake)

Outlet Temperature Outlet temperature of the cooling medium (outgoing air)

Aux Power Supply Auxiliary voltage of the internal auxiliary power supply for the transmitter
rack
The value must be approx. 12 V.

4.6.2 Measure Values/Amplifier x Menu Window


Outputstage x > Measure Values > Rack Measure Values > Rack x > Amplifier x

The Measure Values/Amplifier x menu window displays the measurement values for the
amplifier.

The following table explains the meaning of the fields:

3562.0908.72 - 5.101 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Display Explanation

I101 - I108 Module current of an output stage module

I[Drv] Current of the driver stage

U[DC] Supply voltage of the amplifier

PWR[Out] Forward voltage of the output-power detector

PWR[Refl] Reflected voltage of the reflected-power detector

4.7 Device Info Menu

You can use the Device Info/Rack Controller menu to call up information about the trans-
mitter rack.

4.7.1 Device Info/Rack Controller Menu Window


Outputstage A > Device Info > Rack x > Rack Controller

In the Device Info/Rack Controller menu window you can call up information about the
transmitter rack.

The following table explains the meaning of the display fields:

Display Explanation

Part Number Shows the stock number of the module.

Variant Shows the variant.

Product index Shows the instrument index.

3562.0908.72 - 5.102 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

Display Explanation

Serial Number Shows the serial number.

Product Date Shows the date.

SW/FW/BIOS Number Shows the number of the software/firmware/BIOS.

SW/FW/BIOS Version Shows the version number of the software/firmware/BIOS.

3562.0908.72 - 5.103 - EN-5


Chapter 5 Operation

3562.0908.72 - 5.104 - EN-5


Broadcasting Division

CHAPTER 6

MAINTENANCE

Printed in Germany

3562.0908.72 - 6.1 - EN-5


Chapter 6 Maintenance

CONTENTS

1 Maintenance Information ................................................................ 4


1.1 Recommendation ...........................................................................................4
1.2 Maintenance of Subcontractor Products .....................................................4
1.2.1 Fans in Exciter ..............................................................................................4
1.2.2 Fans in Transmitter Rack .............................................................................4
1.3 Maintenance of Air Filters ..............................................................................5
1.3.1 Changing Air Filter Pad ................................................................................6

3562.0908.72 - 6.3 - EN-5


Chapter 6 Maintenance

1 Maintenance Information

1.1 Recommendation

The transmitter is designed to provide years of operation with little maintenance. Rohde &
Schwarz recommends the following maintenance tasks as a precaution:

Replacing the rack fan after approx. 40000 operating hours


Replacing the two fans in the exciter after approx. 40000 operating hours
Replacing the backup battery in the R&S NetCCU800 in accordance with the mainte-
nance instructions in the R&S NetCCU800 manual
Software updates for the R&S NetCCU800, the exciter, the amplifier and the rack con-
troller as required
(for improved performance and for retrofitting options)

Note The software for all the modules installed in a transmitter is updated principally via the R&S
NetCCU800. Detailed information on software updates can be found in the "Maintenance"
section of the R&S NetCCU800 manual.
Detailed information about replacing the backup battery in the R&S NetCCU800 can be
found in the R&S NetCCU800 manual.

Detailed information about replacing the fan in the exciter can be found in the "Mainte-
nance" section of the exciter manual.

1.2 Maintenance of Subcontractor Products

Subcontractor products such as external air filters must be maintained in accordance with
the maintenance instructions from the respective manufacturer and for the respective prod-
uct.

1.2.1 Fans in Exciter


A malfunction of the fans in the exciter is displayed on the R&S NetCCU800. If necessary
these fans must be replaced with new ones.

1.2.2 Fans in Transmitter Rack


The ball bearings in the rack fans contain a lubricant designed to last for the service life of
the fan. The ball bearings do not need to be lubricated in the context of maintenance. A mal-
function of the internal or external rack fans makes itself noticeable well before it actually
occurs. These large fans can usually be repaired if a maintenance inspection is carried out
in good time. The nominal service life of the ball bearings is ~12000 h (approx. 1.5 years).
Experience shows that the service life is in fact a multiple of 12000 h.

3562.0908.72 - 6.4 - EN-5


Chapter 6 Maintenance

Recommendation

After about a year of continuous operation an inspection should be carried out at half-yearly
intervals. The following must be noted:

Noises (squealing or whistling sounds)


Strong vibrations
Whether the fan wheel lags when the fan is turned off
Freewheeling of the fan wheel
Braking due to friction
Checks to be carried out on a stationary fan wheel (turning it gently)

The fan manufacturer can provide replacement ball bearings for repairs. With a little expe-
rience it is possible for customers to change the ball bearings. Such work should be left to
well-trained, specialist personnel.

Rohde & Schwarz recommends that these fans should either be replaced by new ones or
sent for repair to the actual fan manufacturer. When ordering replacement parts be sure to
tell the manufacturer the number shown on the fan type label.

Fans can be sent to the following address:

Elektror Karl W. Mller GmbH & CO.KG Geraeteserviceannahme Karl W. Mueller Strasse
2 68753 Waghaeusel Germany

Web site: http://www.elektror.de/Service.service.0.html

1.3 Maintenance of Air Filters

If the rear panel of your transmitter is fitted with an air filter unit, you can either vacuum clean
the filter pads or replace them if they are very dirty.

Note There is no air filter pad in the R&S NR8215 transmitter.

Fig. 1 Air filter unit

3562.0908.72 - 6.5 - EN-5


Chapter 6 Maintenance

1.3.1 Changing Air Filter Pad


To change the filter pad in an air filter unit, proceed as follows:

1. Undo the six knurled screws on the air filter unit.

2. Remove the cover.

3562.0908.72 - 6.6 - EN-5


Chapter 6 Maintenance

3. Remove the used air filter pad.


4. Put in a new air filter pad.

5. Fasten the cover onto the air filter unit with the six knurled screws.

3562.0908.72 - 6.7 - EN-5


Chapter 6 Maintenance

3562.0908.72 - 6.8 - EN-5


Broadcasting Division

CHAPTER 7

TROUBLESHOOTING

Printed in Germany

3562.0908.72 - 7.1 - EN-5


Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

CONTENTS

1 Information ....................................................................................... 4

3562.0908.72 - 7.3 - EN-5


Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

1 Information

The "Troubleshooting" chapter will be compiled later.

3562.0908.72 - 7.4 - EN-5


Broadcasting Division

CHAPTER 8

SERVICING

Printed in Germany

3562.0908.72 - 8.1 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

CONTENTS

1 Necessary Tools and Test Equipment ........................................... 6

2 Overview ........................................................................................... 7

3 Preparatory Work ............................................................................. 8


3.1 Safety ...............................................................................................................8
3.2 Cabling ............................................................................................................8
3.3 Removing Front Panel/Rear Panel ................................................................9

4 Power Distribution ......................................................................... 10


4.1 Replacing Main Switch .................................................................................10
4.1.1 Removing Main Switch ...............................................................................10
4.1.2 Installing Main Switch .................................................................................11
4.2 Replacing Motor Protection Switch ............................................................12
4.2.1 Removing Motor Protection Switch ............................................................12
4.2.2 Installing Motor Protection Switch ..............................................................12
4.3 Replacing Power Distribution Board ..........................................................13
4.3.1 Removing Power Distribution Board ..........................................................13
4.3.2 Installing Power Distribution Board ............................................................14
4.4 Replacing Automatic Line Fuses ................................................................14
4.4.1 Removing Automatic Line Fuse .................................................................14
4.4.2 Installing Automatic Line Fuse ...................................................................15
4.5 Replacing Auxiliary Power Supply Unit .....................................................15
4.5.1 Removing Auxiliary Power Supply Unit ......................................................15
4.5.2 Installing Auxiliary Power Supply Unit ........................................................17

5 Transmitter Control Unit ............................................................... 18


5.1 Replacing R&S NetCCU800 .........................................................................18
5.1.1 Removing R&S NetCCU800 ......................................................................18
5.1.2 Preparing R&S NetCCU800 for Installation ................................................19
5.1.3 Installing R&S NetCCU800 ........................................................................19
5.2 Replacing Rack Controller ...........................................................................20
5.2.1 Removing Rack Controller .........................................................................20
5.2.2 Installing Rack Controller ...........................................................................21

6 Exciter ............................................................................................. 22

3562.0908.72 - 8.3 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

6.1 Replacing Exciter .........................................................................................22


6.1.1 Removing Exciter .......................................................................................22
6.1.2 Installing Exciter .........................................................................................23
6.2 Replacing Exciter Switch .............................................................................24
6.2.1 Removing Exciter Switch ............................................................................24
6.2.2 Installing Exciter Switch ..............................................................................25

7 Output Stage .................................................................................. 26


7.1 Replacing Splitter .........................................................................................26
7.1.1 Removing Splitter .......................................................................................26
7.1.2 Removing Multirack Splitter ........................................................................28
7.1.3 Installing Splitter .........................................................................................28
7.2 Replacing Combiner .....................................................................................28
7.2.1 Removing Combiner ...................................................................................29
7.2.2 Installing Combiner .....................................................................................29
7.3 Replacing Amplifiers ....................................................................................30
7.3.1 Removing Amplifier ....................................................................................30
7.3.2 Installing Amplifier ......................................................................................31
7.4 Replacing Preamplifier .................................................................................31
7.4.1 Removing Preamplifier ...............................................................................31
7.4.2 Installing Preamplifier .................................................................................32
7.5 Replacing Absorber .....................................................................................33
7.5.1 Replacing Absorber on 5 kW to 12.5/20 kW Transmitters .........................33
7.5.2 Replacing Absorber on 15 kW Transmitters ...............................................34

8 Cooling System .............................................................................. 39


8.1 Replacing Fans .............................................................................................39
8.1.1 Removing Fan ............................................................................................39
8.1.1.1 Transmitters R&S NR8202, R&S NR8205 and R&S NR8207 .......................... 39
8.1.1.2 Transmitters R&S NR8210, R&S NR8212 and R&S NR8215 .......................... 41
8.1.2 Installing Fan ..............................................................................................43
8.2 Replacing Differential Pressure Gages ......................................................43
8.2.1 Removing Differential Pressure Gage ........................................................43
8.2.1.1 Transmitters R&S NR8202, R&S NR8205 and R&S NR8207 .......................... 43
8.2.1.2 Transmitters R&S NR8210, R&S NR8212 and R&S NR8215 .......................... 44
8.2.2 Installing Differential Pressure Gage ..........................................................46
8.3 Replacing Temperature Sensors ................................................................46
8.3.1 Removing Temperature Sensor .................................................................47
8.3.2 Installing Temperature Sensor ...................................................................48

3562.0908.72 - 8.4 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

8.4 Replacing Starting Capacitors ....................................................................49


8.4.1 Removing Starting Capacitor .....................................................................49
8.4.2 Installing Starting Capacitor .......................................................................49

9 Connection Panel .......................................................................... 50


9.1 Replacing Modulation Input ........................................................................50
9.1.1 Removing Modulation Input ........................................................................50
9.1.2 Installing Modulation Input ..........................................................................51
9.2 Replacing Parallel Remote-Control Interface ............................................51
9.2.1 Removing Parallel Remote-Control Interface .............................................51
9.2.2 Installing Parallel Remote-Control Interface ...............................................52

3562.0908.72 - 8.5 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

1 Necessary Tools and Test Equipment

Depending on the service work to be performed, you will require the following tools:

One set of screwdrivers


One set of Phillips screwdrivers
One set of Torx screwdrivers
One pair of flat pliers
One pair of tweezers (fine)
2 wrenches, width 13
One set of Allen keys
Open-end wrench 8 mm for SMA connector (torque wrench)
Open-end wrench 10 mm for fan fastenings
Open-end wrench 13 mm
Pin wrench for RL58
Open-end wrench M32
Socket wrench size 7

Note For taking measurements you will also need a digital voltmeter and a rotary field meter for
3-phase AC supply voltage.

3562.0908.72 - 8.6 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

2 Overview

You can remove and exchange the following transmitter components if errors occur:

Power distribution
Main switch
Motor protection switch
Power distribution board
Automatic line fuse
Auxiliary power supply
Transmitter control unit
R&S NetCCU800
Rack controller
Exciter
Exciter
Exciter switch (in the case of exciter standby)
Output stage
Power splitter
Multiple rack splitter (for multiple rack)
Amplifier
Preamplifier (multiple rack)
Combiner
Absorber (for transmitter R&S NR8215 with absorber cooling system)
Cooling system
Fan
Differential pressure gage
Temperature sensor
Connection panel
Modulation input
Parallel remote control interface

Note Service operations involve simply localizing and replacing a defective module.Repairs to
modules are carried out at the manufacturer's Central Service.

3562.0908.72 - 8.7 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

3 Preparatory Work

3.1 Safety

ATTENTION!
You need to pay particular attention to safety during service work. As a matter of principle
all service work must be carried out by qualified personnel on components that are discon-
nected from the power supply. Heavy components such as amplifiers, which weigh some
29 kg, must always be replaced by two people working together using appropriate trans-
porting and installation aids (suitable lifting gear can be ordered from R&S).

Note Full information on the subject of safety can be found in the section "Safety".

3.2 Cabling

The standard transmitter components in the R&S NR8000 series are fully cabled together
on delivery. You need to reconnect the separate replacement instruments during service
work.

Each cable has a yellow collar or cable tie at each end, inscribed with the cable number
(W...) and the intended purpose (module number A..., connector number X...). This makes
it easier to connect the cable concerned to the intended slot or connection point, since the
modules are provided with an engraved or self-adhesive circuit diagram.

For easy connection of replacement instruments or devices proceed as follows:

1. Find the number of the plug connector from the yellow collar or cable tie on the end of
the cable.
2. Find the same number on the instrument you wish to connect (by looking for the female
connector or circuit diagram).

3. Insert the plug connector into the corresponding female connector.

3562.0908.72 - 8.8 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

3.3 Removing Front Panel/Rear Panel

To remove the front panel/rear panel proceed as follows:

) Undo the fastening screws with the aid of a Torx screwdriver and then remove the front
panel/rear panel.

Note If necessary you must also disconnect the ground connection (see below).

Fig. 1 Ground terminal of a front panel/rear panel

3562.0908.72 - 8.9 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

4 Power Distribution

You can replace the following power distribution components:

Main switch (power supply terminal)


Motor protection switch
Automatic line fuse
Power distribution board
Auxiliary power supply

4.1 Replacing Main Switch

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any servic-
ing work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid dam-
age to the instruments.

4.1.1 Removing Main Switch


To remove the main switch proceed as follows:

1. Using a Torx screwdriver, remove the lower cover plate on the front panel of the rack.
2. Unscrew the rotary knob and the main switch cover.

Fig. 2 Unscrewing the rotary knob and the cover

3. Undo the screws on the switch housing and remove the connected cables.
4. Undo the screws on the terminal rack on the left of the main switch and slide the terminal
rack to the left.
5. Pull forward the black stop lever on the underside of the main switch.

3562.0908.72 - 8.10 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

6. Carefully take out the main switch.

Fig. 3 Taking out the main switch

4.1.2 Installing Main Switch


1. Replace the main switch by proceeding in the reverse order.
2. Insert the cables into the corresponding openings and fasten them with the screws.
Note Notice how the cables are labeled and make sure they are in the right sequence, since
two of the three phase cables are the same color (black).

3. Check the direction of rotation of the three phase AC (standard: clockwise).


If the rotary field is correct, continue with the next step; if it is wrong, swap two wires from
the cable and measure the rotary field again.

4. Screw the main switch cover and the rotary knob back on.
Note When working on the transmitter rack the main switch can be locked in the "OFF" posi-
tion (see next figure).

Fig. 4 Main switch locked

3562.0908.72 - 8.11 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

4.2 Replacing Motor Protection Switch

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any servic-
ing work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid dam-
age to the instruments.

4.2.1 Removing Motor Protection Switch


To remove the motor protection switch proceed as follows:

1. Using a Torx screwdriver, remove the lower cover plate on the front panel of the rack.

Fig. 5 Removing the Motor Protection Switch

2. Press the motor protection switch sharply downward and pull it forward by the bottom
edge. Because there is a spring clip behind the upper edge, you can only release the
switch downward.
3. Use a screwdriver to open the cable clamps and pull out the connected cable.
4. Remove the motor protection switch.

4.2.2 Installing Motor Protection Switch


) Replace the motor protection switch by proceeding in the reverse order.

3562.0908.72 - 8.12 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Note When replacing, feed the shorting plug right in and push the switch into place with some
force.

4.3 Replacing Power Distribution Board

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any servic-
ing work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid dam-
age to the instruments.

4.3.1 Removing Power Distribution Board


To remove the power distribution board proceed as follows:

1. Remove all plugs before removing the power distribution board.


2. Unscrew the D-Sub connector on the right of the longitudinal edge (two screws).
3. Undo the eight screws on the automatic line fuses.
4. Remove the seven screws on the PCB.

Fig. 6 Removing the power distribution board

1) Screws on the automatic line fuses


2) Screws on the D-Sub connector
3) Screws on the PCB.

5. To take out the PCB, first slide it downward.

3562.0908.72 - 8.13 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

4.3.2 Installing Power Distribution Board


) Replace the power distribution board by proceeding in the reverse order.

Note When replacing the power distribution board, make sure that it feeds into the right slots.

Fig. 7 Installing the power distribution board

1) Wrong
2) Right
3) Pressing with a screwdriver visibly opens the right chamber

4.4 Replacing Automatic Line Fuses

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any servic-
ing work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid dam-
age to the instruments.

4.4.1 Removing Automatic Line Fuse


Note Before removing an automatic line fuse, the power distribution board must be removed (see
"Removing the Power Distribution Board").

To remove the automatic line fuse proceed as follows:

1. Remove the power distribution board.


2. From above, grip the back of the automatic line fuse you wish to remove and undo the
white plastic springs.
3. Remove the automatic line fuse.

3562.0908.72 - 8.14 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Fig. 8 Automatic line fuse

1) Upper plastic spring


2) Lower plastic spring

4.4.2 Installing Automatic Line Fuse


) Replace the automatic line fuse by proceeding in the reverse order.

4.5 Replacing Auxiliary Power Supply Unit

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any servic-
ing work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid dam-
age to the instruments.

4.5.1 Removing Auxiliary Power Supply Unit


To remove the auxiliary power supply proceed as follows:

) Undo the auxiliary power supply cables (X34, X45) from the power distribution board.
Trace the two cables and if necessary cut off the cable ties.

3562.0908.72 - 8.15 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Fig. 9 Auxiliary power supply for R&S NR8200

) Undo two Allen screws on the front panel of the power supply unit (R&S NR8200)

or

Fig. 10 Auxiliary power supplies for multiple transmitters

) Undo the three Allen screws with which the power supplies are fastened (multiple trans-
mitters).

) Remove the auxiliary power supply unit(s).

3562.0908.72 - 8.16 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Fig. 11 Removing the auxiliary power supply

4.5.2 Installing Auxiliary Power Supply Unit


) Replace the auxiliary power supply unit(s) by proceeding in the reverse order.

3562.0908.72 - 8.17 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

5 Transmitter Control Unit

You can replace the following transmitter control unit components:

R&S NetCCU800
Rack controller

5.1 Replacing R&S NetCCU800

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any servic-
ing work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid dam-
age to the instruments.

5.1.1 Removing R&S NetCCU800


Note Removing the R&S NetCCU800 does not affect transmission.

1. Undo the two captive screws from the R&S NetCCU800 and the exciter on the front
brackets (next to the handles).
2. Using the handles, slowly pull out the rackmount from the rack as far as it will go (the
guide rails will engage and lock in place).
3. Disconnect the power cable from the rear panel of the R&S NetCCU800.
4. Disconnect all cabling from the rear panel of the R&S NetCCU800.

3562.0908.72 - 8.18 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Fig. 12 R&S NetCCU800 and two exciters in rackmount

1) Captive screws at front of instruments


2) Screws securing R&S NetCCU800 and exciters to rackmount
3) Guide rails
4) Support bracket for the R&S NetCCU800
5) Support bracket for first exciter
6) Support bracket for second exciter (with exciter standby)
7) Safety lever for locking/unlocking guide rail latch

5. Undo the two rackmount fastening screws on both sides of the R&S NetCCU800.
Note It is advisable that two persons remove the R&S NetCCU800. As soon as the support
brackets cease to support the R&S NetCCU800 while it is being pulled out using the
handles, it needs to be supported from below.

6. Pull the R&S NetCCU800 from the rackmount.

5.1.2 Preparing R&S NetCCU800 for Installation


The replacement R&S NetCCU800 is delivered as a desktop unit and must be prepared for
installation as follows.

) Remove the protective rubber caps from the rear feet of the instrument.

5.1.3 Installing R&S NetCCU800


To install the unit in the transmitter, reverse the procedure used to remove it.

3562.0908.72 - 8.19 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

1. Slide the R&S NetCCU800 horizontally into the rackmount on the lowest support brack-
ets until the screw holes in the plug-in housing and on the side panels of the R&S
NetCCU800 line up.
2. Fasten the R&S NetCCU800 with two screws on each side.
3. Connect the cables to the R&S NetCCU800 according to the labeling (see yellow cable
collars).
4. Undo the latch on the guide rails. Push down the safety lever on the right while simulta-
neously pushing up the safety lever on the left and slide the rackmount into the rack.
5. Retighten the two captive screws on the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800 and exciter.

Note When installing the R&S NetCCU800 cables and putting the unit back into operation, refer
to the information in the transmitter manual.

5.2 Replacing Rack Controller

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any servic-
ing work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid dam-
age to the instruments.

Note The rack controller is underneath the R&S NetCCU800. A multiple transmitter has two rack
controllers built into the rackmount.

5.2.1 Removing Rack Controller


1. Remove the cover by undoing the two screws.

2. Turn the two screws at the sides alternately, a couple of turns at a time.
This removes the rack controller from the rack without tilting.

3562.0908.72 - 8.20 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Fig. 13 Removing the rack controller from the transmitter rack

3. Remove the rack controller from the rack.

5.2.2 Installing Rack Controller


To install the unit in the transmitter, reverse the procedure used to remove it.

3562.0908.72 - 8.21 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

6 Exciter

You can replace the following exciter components:

Exciter
Exciter switch

6.1 Replacing Exciter

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any servic-
ing work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid dam-
age to the instruments.

6.1.1 Removing Exciter


1. Undo the two captive screws from the R&S NetCCU800 and the exciter on the front
brackets (next to the handles).
2. Using the handles, slowly pull out the rackmount from the rack as far as it will go (the
guide rails will engage and lock in place).
3. Disconnect the supply cable from the rear panel of the exciter.
4. Disconnect all further cabling from the rear panel of the exciter.

3562.0908.72 - 8.22 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Fig. 14 R&S NetCCU800 and two exciters in rackmount

1) Captive screws at front of instruments


2) Screws securing R&S NetCCU800 and exciters to rackmount
3) Guide rails
4) Support bracket for the R&S NetCCU800
5) Support bracket for first exciter
6) Support bracket for second exciter (with exciter standby)
7) Safety lever for locking/unlocking guide rail latch

5. Undo the two rackmount fastening screws on both sides of the exciter.
6. Pull the exciter from the rackmount.

6.1.2 Installing Exciter


To install the unit in the transmitter, reverse the procedure used to remove it.

Note R&S SU800 models 02 (VAR02) and 03 (VAR03) have different pin assignments for mod-
ulation interface X7A. Therefore when exchanging an exciter, check the transmitter rack to
see whether the original and replacement instrument are the same model. If not, then the
modulation cable connecting the interface X7A to the modulation input X1A or X1B on the
transmitter top must also be exchanged.

Model 02 (VAR02) Model 03 (VAR03)

3562.0908.72 - 8.23 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

1. Slide the exciter into the cabinet horizontally on the support brackets until the screw
holes on the cabinet and on the side panels of the exciter match.
2. Fasten the exciter with two screws on each side.
3. Check whether the original and replacement instrument are the same model. If not,
swap the modulation cable on the modulation input X1A or X1B (standby exciter) for the
appropriate replacement cable.

Stock num-
Interface Cable end Interface
ber
R&S SU800 R&S SU800 Modulation input
of cable

VAR02 3562.4049.00 X7A (Exc A/B) W20/A100A/B-X7A X1A (Exciter A)


X1B (Exciter B)

VAR03 3562.4061.00 X7A (Exc A/B) W20/A100A/B-X7A X1A (Exciter A)


X1B (Exciter B)

4. Connect the cables to the exciter according to the labeling (see yellow cable collars).
5. Undo the latch on the guide rails. Push down the safety lever on the right while simulta-
neously pushing up the safety lever on the left and slide the rackmount into the rack.
6. Retighten the two captive screws on the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800 and exciter.

6.2 Replacing Exciter Switch

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any servic-
ing work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid dam-
age to the instruments.

The exciter switch in transmitters with the exciter standby option (two exciters) is located
behind the two exciters.

6.2.1 Removing Exciter Switch


Note So that you can conveniently remove the exciter switch, you need to remove the R&S
NetCCU800 and the exciter from the rack.

1. Undo the two captive screws from the R&S NetCCU800 and the exciter on the front
brackets (next to the handles).
2. Using the handles, slowly pull out the rackmount from the rack as far as it will go (the
guide rails will engage and lock in place).

3562.0908.72 - 8.24 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Fig. 15 Removing the exciter switch from the transmitter rack

1) SMA connectors
2) Screws on the D-Sub connector
3) Retaining screws

3. Undo the SMA connectors X1 - X4 using an open-end wrench (8 mm).


4. Undo the screws on the D-Sub connector X5 and disconnect the power plug.
5. Remove the diagonally arranged round-headed Phillips screws.
6. Remove the exciter switch from the transmitter rack.

6.2.2 Installing Exciter Switch


To install the unit in the transmitter, reverse the procedure used to remove it.

1. Connect the cables to the exciter switch according to the labeling (see yellow cable col-
lars).
Note The screws on the SMA connectors X1 - X4 should be tightened only lightly.

2. Undo the latch on the extending rails. Push down the safety lever on the right while si-
multaneously pushing up the safety lever on the left and slide the rackmount into the
rack.
3. Retighten the two captive screws on the front panel of the R&S NetCCU800 and exciter.

3562.0908.72 - 8.25 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

7 Output Stage

You can replace the following output stage components:

Splitter/multiple rack splitter (multiple rack only)


Combiner
Amplifier
Preamplifier (multiple rack only)
Absorber (for 15 kW transmitter with fan)

7.1 Replacing Splitter

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any servic-
ing work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid dam-
age to the instruments.

Note This description applies only to transmitters in the power range 7.5 - 12.5 kW. In 5 kW trans-
mitters the splitter forms an integral part of the 5 kW coupler. To replace it you need to re-
place the whole coupler.

7.1.1 Removing Splitter


To remove the splitter proceed as follows:

1. Disconnect all SMA cables.

3562.0908.72 - 8.26 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Fig. 16 Splitter with SMA cables

2. Undo the four fastening screws.


Note Keep a firm hold on the splitter when undoing the last screw, as there are no guide pins.

Fig. 17 Removing the splitter

3562.0908.72 - 8.27 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

3. Remove the splitter.

7.1.2 Removing Multirack Splitter


To remove the splitter proceed as follows:

1. Disconnect all SMA cables.

Fig. 18 Multiple rack splitter (the righthand splitter in the picture on the left has no SMA cable)

2. Undo the four fastening screws.


Note Keep a firm hold on the splitter when undoing the last screw, as there are no guide pins.

3. Remove the splitter and turn it through 180.


4. Undo the eight fastening screws (right) on the rear of the splitter.

7.1.3 Installing Splitter


To install the unit in the transmitter, reverse the procedure used to remove it.

Note When reinstalling the splitter the union nuts on the SMA cable should be tightened only
lightly (60 Ncm) using an open-end wrench (8 mm).

7.2 Replacing Combiner

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any servic-
ing work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid dam-
age to the instruments.

3562.0908.72 - 8.28 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

7.2.1 Removing Combiner


Note If the transmitter is still connected to other RF components at the RF output, these must be
unscrewed prior to removal.

1. Using a Torx screwdriver, remove the rear panel of the transmitter.


2. Undo the Allen screws on the lower bracket of the rigid line set and the screw on the
union clamp above the directional coupler.

Fig. 19 Removing the combiner

1) Lower bracket of the rigid line set


2) Union clamp

3. Carefully pull the rigid line set downward from the combiner output.
4. Slide the rigid line set upward.
5. Dismantle the intake duct from the transmitter rack.
6. Disconnect all SMA cables from the splitter.
7. Undo the four fastening screws at the corners of the combiner.
The combiner will now be supported by the amplifier connectors and four guide pins.

8. Pull the combiner from the rack.

7.2.2 Installing Combiner


To install the unit in the transmitter, reverse the procedure used to remove it.

3562.0908.72 - 8.29 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

7.3 Replacing Amplifiers

When replacing an amplifier from the R&S NR8000 transmitter family, you do not have to
remove any of the lines since the connections on the rear panel of the device are connected
to the rack using automatic connectors.

7.3.1 Removing Amplifier

ATTENTION!
Prior to being removed, the amplifier must be completely de-energized in order to prevent
any possible damage to the device due to contact consumption.

1. Switch off the amplifier via the AC distributor in the transmitter rack (turn the appropriate
protective switch to the "OFF" position).
Note The other devices in the transmitter rack can remain connected. A transmitter with mul-
tiple amplifiers can remain in operation with reduced power during the exchange of the
amplifier.

2. Undo the four captive screws on each side of the front panel.

CAUTION!
Risk of burns on the heat sink. Let the amplifier cool down for about five minutes with the
transmitter cooling switched on before you remove it from the transmitter rack.

CAUTION!
When you pull it out of the transmitter rack, do not allow the amplifier to fall. Support it from
below. The absorber weighs about 29 kg so we suggest that you use two people to handle
it.

3. Pull the amplifier slowly from the rack using the handles.
The connectors should release automatically on the rear panel of the device.

ATTENTION!
To avoid damaging the connectors, do not place the amplifier on its back.

4. Put the amplifier down with the bottom of the instrument facing downward.

3562.0908.72 - 8.30 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

7.3.2 Installing Amplifier


To install the unit in the transmitter, reverse the procedure used to remove it.

7.4 Replacing Preamplifier

A multiple rack transmitter (e.g. 20 kW) may have one or two preamplifiers built into the left-
hand rack depending on the configuration chosen (single drive with one exciter or dual drive
with exciter standby).

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any servic-
ing work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid dam-
age to the instruments.

7.4.1 Removing Preamplifier


1. Turn off the main switch.
2. Remove the left side panel or rear panel of the rack.
3. Remove all RF lines from the preamplifiers.
4. Pull out the rackmount slide for the R&S NetCCU800/exciter as far as the stop.

Fig. 20 Preparations for removing the preamplifier

1) Preamplifier
2) Rack controller

CAUTION!
Unscrewing the rear support for the D-Sub connectors detaches all connectors.

5. Unscrew the rear support for the D-Sub connectors on the rack controller.

3562.0908.72 - 8.31 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Fig. 21 Connector strip on the rack controller

6. Remove the connector X11 to the preamplifiers and if necessary remove cable ties.

Fig. 22 Connector strip on the rack controller

1) Cable gland of the preamplifier


2) Power supply connectors

7. Remove power supply cables A101a/b or unsolder the connectors for the supply voltage
to the preamplifier (note the polarity and if necessary apply labels).
8. Undo four Torx screws per preamplifier from the base plate and withdraw the amplifier.

7.4.2 Installing Preamplifier


To install the unit in the transmitter, reverse the procedure used to remove it.

Note Connect all signal cables to the preamplifier and fasten them with 60 Ncm of torque.

3562.0908.72 - 8.32 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

7.5 Replacing Absorber

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any servic-
ing work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid dam-
age to the instruments.

7.5.1 Replacing Absorber on 5 kW to 12.5/20 kW Transmitters

Removing the Absorber

To remove the absorber proceed as follows:

1. Using a Torx screwdriver, undo the captive screws on the front panel covering the rack
space where the absorber is installed (below the last amplifier).
2. Undo the two Allen screws at the back, below the coupler.

CAUTION!
Risk of burns on the heat sink. Let the absorber cool down for about five minutes with the
transmitter cooling switched on before you remove it from the transmitter rack.

CAUTION!
When you pull it out of the transmitter rack, do not allow the absorber to fall. Support it
from below. The absorber weighs about 21 kg so we suggest that you use two people to
handle it.

3. Pull the absorber carefully out of the rack.


The connectors should release automatically on the rear panel of the device.

ATTENTION!
To avoid damaging the connectors, do not place the absorber on its back.

3562.0908.72 - 8.33 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Fig. 23 Removing the absorber

Installing the Absorber

To install the unit in the transmitter, reverse the procedure used to remove it.

ATTENTION!
Always have a second person assist you in installing the absorber block as the instru-
ments are very heavy (approx. 20 kg).

1. Select the installation position provided for the absorber block in the transmitter rack (be-
low the last amplifier).
2. Place the absorber block on the guide rails and slide it carefully into the rack as far as it
will go.
The absorber is guided onto the connections by means of guide pins on the rear panel.

3. Fasten the absorber block on the rack from behind using the two Allen screws.

7.5.2 Replacing Absorber on 15 kW Transmitters

Removing the Absorber

The installation position for the two absorber blocks of 7.5 kW each is located at the rear of
the transmitter. The absorber has a dedicated fan system, and this section will describe how
it is installed.

CAUTION!
Risk of burns on the heat sink. Let the absorber cool down for about ten minutes before
you remove it from the transmitter rack.

3562.0908.72 - 8.34 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

CAUTION!
When you pull it out of the transmitter rack, do not allow the absorber to fall. Support it
from below. The absorber weighs about 21 kg so we suggest that you use two people to
handle it.

To remove the absorber proceed as follows:

1. Remove the upper and lower connectors on the absorber blocks.


a) Undo the union nuts of the RF connectors (1) with the aid of an open-end wrench
M32.
b) Undo the absorber monitoring cable (2) and control cable for switching the absorber
fan on and off.

1) RF cable to coupler
2) Absorber monitoring cable
3) Control cable for switching the absorber fan on/off

2. Undo the four Torx screws (3x8) from the two metal braces with which the first absorber
block is fastened and remove them.

3562.0908.72 - 8.35 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

3. Tip the upper part of the absorber block outward and remove it from the absorber brack-
et (see also lower picture - removing the second absorber block).
4. Using a Torx screwdriver from above, undo the cable gland from the two distance U piec-
es and remove the U pieces from below.

5. Tip the upper part of the second absorber block outward and remove it from the absorber
bracket.

3562.0908.72 - 8.36 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Removing the absorber fan

To remove the absorber proceed as follows:

1. Undo the union nut from the AC power supply and disconnect the power plug. Undo re-
maining fixing screws on the AC connector and pull the connector upward and out.
2. Undo the four fixing screws (2) from the fan and carefully remove the fan horizontally
toward the left.
3. If necessary unscrew the running rails from the fan (3) and screw them to a replacement
fan.

3562.0908.72 - 8.37 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Installing the absorber and fan

To install the unit in the transmitter, reverse the procedure used to remove it.

ATTENTION!
Always have a second person assist you in installing the absorber block as the instrument
is very heavy.

Note The sequence for the RF connectors is arbitrary.

3562.0908.72 - 8.38 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

8 Cooling System

Various cooling systems can be used for the transmitters of the R&S NR8200 transmitter
family. Owing to the different procedures involved, the service work is described as follows:

for the transmitters R&S NR8202, R&S NR8205 and R&S NR8207
for the transmitters R&S NR8210, R&S NR8212 and R&S NR8215

You can replace the following cooling system components:

Fans
Differential pressure gages
Temperature sensors
Starting capacitors

8.1 Replacing Fans

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any servic-
ing work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid dam-
age to the instruments.

8.1.1 Removing Fan

8.1.1.1 Transmitters R&S NR8202, R&S NR8205 and R&S NR8207

Note Before removal, make sure you know which of the two fans needs to be replaced.

1. Using a Torx screwdriver No. 20, remove the front panel of the power distribution to re-
place the front fan, or the rear panel of the transmitter to replace the rear fan.
2. Switch off the automatic line fuse F6 (rear fan) or F7 (front fan).
Note Wait two minutes before starting to remove the fan (to allow for the fan overrun time).

3. Undo the four screws on the fan housing and remove the cover.

3562.0908.72 - 8.39 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Fig. 24 Undoing screws on fan housing

4. On the upper side of the fan housing is a retaining device that must be unscrewed using
a Torx screwdriver No. 20.

Fig. 25 Unscrewing retaining device

5. Pull the power cable out of the connector and pull off the air tube.

3562.0908.72 - 8.40 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

6. Slide the fan slightly to the side, then pull it toward yourself and out of the fan hous-
ing.The fan is easy to remove due to the guide rails.

Fig. 26 Removing fan

8.1.1.2 Transmitters R&S NR8210, R&S NR8212 and R&S NR8215

1. Remove the inlet air ducts before removing the fan.


2. Switch off automatic line fuses F6 and Q8.

or
In multiple transmitter racks: Switch off the upper automatic line fuse of both transmit-
ters.
3. Wait two minutes before starting to remove the fan (to allow for the fan overrun time).
4. Using a Torx screwdriver No. 20, remove the front panel of the power distribution (and
in the case of a multiple transmitter remove the cover on the fan connections).

3562.0908.72 - 8.41 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Fig. 27 Fan connection to the power distribution (lt. R&S NR8200, rt. multiple transmitter)

5. Disconnect the fan cables.


6. Using a Torx screwdriver No. 20, remove the rear panel from the transmitter so that the
fan can be taken out.
7. Remove AC supply W8.1 from the power distribution and slide the connection toward
the back in the direction of the fan.
8. Undo the two screws on the fan mounting base and the four screws on the pressure-
side flange using an open-end wrench (size 10) and then pull the fan carefully out.

1) Two screws on the mounting base


2) Four screws on the pressure-side flange

9. Unscrew the AC supply on the upper side of the fan housing with the aid of a socket
wrench (size 7) and a screwdriver (size 4).

3562.0908.72 - 8.42 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Fig. 28 Connecting the power cable to the fan

8.1.2 Installing Fan


To install the unit in the transmitter, reverse the procedure used to remove it.

Note Take special care to ensure the correct wiring of the power connector (L1, L2, L3 and PE).

8.2 Replacing Differential Pressure Gages

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any servic-
ing work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid dam-
age to the instruments.

8.2.1 Removing Differential Pressure Gage

8.2.1.1 Transmitters R&S NR8202, R&S NR8205 and R&S NR8207

Note Before removal, make sure you know which of the two differential pressure gages needs to
be replaced.

1. Using a Torx screwdriver No. 20, remove the rear panel of the rack.
2. Remove the air connector (plastic tube).
3. Disconnect the associated cable from the connector at X45 of the power distribution
board (Pin 1 and 2 for differential pressure gage 1 or pin 3 and 4 for differential pressure
gage 2).
4. Cut off the cable ties to free the cable.
5. Undo the two screws on the bracket.

3562.0908.72 - 8.43 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

6. Remove the differential pressure gage.


7. Unscrew and remove the round cover and disconnect the cable (6.3 mm connector).

Fig. 29 Removing differential pressure gage

8.2.1.2 Transmitters R&S NR8210, R&S NR8212 and R&S NR8215

1. Using a Torx screwdriver No. 20, remove the front panel of the power distribution (in the
case of a multiple transmitter also remove the rear cover).

3562.0908.72 - 8.44 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Fig. 30 Removing the differential pressure gage (lt. R&S NR8200, rt. multiple transmitter)

2. Remove the air connector (plastic tube).


3. Disconnect the associated cable from the connector on X45 of the power distribution
board.
4. Cut off the cable ties to free the cable.
5. Undo the two screws on the bracket.
Multiple transmitter: Unscrew the top cover of the power distribution to which differen-
tial pressure gages are fastened.

6. Remove the differential pressure gage.

Fig. 31 Removing differential pressure gages (R&S NR8200)

3562.0908.72 - 8.45 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Fig. 32 Removing differential pressure gages (multiple transmitter)

) Unscrew the round cover and remove the cable (6.3 mm connector).

8.2.2 Installing Differential Pressure Gage


To install the unit in the transmitter, reverse the procedure used to remove it.

) Check whether the protective cap for the air nozzle on the left-hand differential pressure
gage has already been removed and if not, remove it (see picture).

Note After installation the differential pressure gage must be set to the switching point of 150 Pa
again.

1. Remove the transparent top cover.


In the middle is a little adjustment wheel (~ 20 mm) with a scale.

2. Use a screwdriver to turn the adjustment wheel until the arrow points to the value 150.

8.3 Replacing Temperature Sensors

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any servic-
ing work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid dam-
age to the instruments.

The transmitter rack contains two temperature sensors (a multiple transmitter has four)
which measure the intake and exhaust air temperatures. They are located on the intake and
outlet lines of the rack.

3562.0908.72 - 8.46 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

8.3.1 Removing Temperature Sensor


Note Before removal, make sure you know which temperature sensor needs to be replaced.

) Using a Torx screwdriver, remove the rear panel of the rack.

Fig. 33 Removing temperature sensor (R&S NR8202, R&S NR8205 and R&S NR8207)

Fig. 34 Removing temperature sensors (R&S NR8200) (left: exhaust air; right: intake air)

3562.0908.72 - 8.47 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Fig. 35 Removing temperature sensors (multiple transmitters)

1) Temperature sensor (intake air) transmitter A


2) Temperature sensor (intake air) transmitter B
3) Temperature sensor (exhaust air) transmitter A (on exhaust air duct)
4) Temperature sensor (exhaust air) transmitter B (perspective: side and rear view - top half of rack)

1. Unplug the connector of the temperature sensor concerned.


2. Undo the two cross-tip screws (M3) on the temperature sensor flange.

1) Openings for fixing screws (M3)

3. Carefully remove the temperature sensor from the opening in the air duct.

8.3.2 Installing Temperature Sensor


To install the unit in the transmitter, reverse the procedure used to remove it.

3562.0908.72 - 8.48 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

8.4 Replacing Starting Capacitors

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any servic-
ing work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid dam-
age to the instruments.

8.4.1 Removing Starting Capacitor


Note Before removal, make sure you know which of the two starting capacitors needs to be re-
placed.

1. Using a Torx screwdriver No. 20, remove the front panel of the power distribution to re-
place the front starting capacitor, or the rear panel of the transmitter to replace the rear
starting capacitor.
2. Switch off the automatic line fuse F6 (fan 1, rear starting capacitor) or F7 (fan 2, front
starting capacitor).
3. Remove the fan connectors.
4. Undo the nut (M8, width across flats 13 mm) on the base of the capacitor.
5. Cut off the cable ties to free the cable.

Fig. 36 Removing starting capacitor

1) Connector (and socket)


2) Cable ties
3) Lock washer
4) Nut (M8)

8.4.2 Installing Starting Capacitor


The unit is installed in the transmitter in the reverse order of removal.

Note The lock washer and M8 nut must be fastened together again.

3562.0908.72 - 8.49 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

9 Connection Panel

You can replace the following connection panel components (the connection panel is locat-
ed on the roof of the transmitter):

Modulation input
Parallel remote control interface

9.1 Replacing Modulation Input

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any servic-
ing work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid dam-
age to the instruments.

9.1.1 Removing Modulation Input


1. Using a Torx screwdriver, remove the rear panel from the rack.
2. Disconnect all cables from the modulation input (D-Sub connector).

3. Undo the two fastening screws on the roof of the transmitter.

Fig. 37 Removing the modulation input

3562.0908.72 - 8.50 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

4. Remove the modulation input from the transmitter rack.

9.1.2 Installing Modulation Input


To install the unit in the transmitter, reverse the procedure used to remove it.

9.2 Replacing Parallel Remote-Control Interface

ATTENTION!
Always make sure that the power supply is disconnected before commencing any servic-
ing work on the transmitter rack. This will prevent injury from electric shock and avoid dam-
age to the instruments.

9.2.1 Removing Parallel Remote-Control Interface


1. Remove the top cover plate above the exciter.
2. Disconnect all connectors and then remove all cables from the remote control interface.

3. Undo the two fastening screws on the roof of the transmitter.


4. Remove the parallel remote control interface from the transmitter rack.

3562.0908.72 - 8.51 - EN-5


Chapter 8 Servicing

Fig. 38 Removing the parallel remote control interface

9.2.2 Installing Parallel Remote-Control Interface


To install the unit in the transmitter, reverse the procedure used to remove it.

3562.0908.72 - 8.52 - EN-5


Broadcasting Division

CHAPTER 9

APPENDIX

Printed in Germany

3562.0908.72 - 9.1 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

CONTENTS

1 Interface Description ....................................................................... 5


1.1 Front-Panel Interfaces ....................................................................................5
1.1.1 Q1 - AC Supply Input / Protective Earth .......................................................5
1.1.2 X57 - R&S ZR800Z1 Connector Kit Option ..................................................5
1.1.3 X33 - External Fan (Optional) .......................................................................5
1.1.4 External Fan for Dummy Antenna (Optional) - Wago Plug-In Terminal .......6
1.1.5 X34 - External Absorber Cooling System (Optional) - Wago Plug-In Terminal
......................................................................................................................6
1.1.6 X41 - RF Carrier Loop ..................................................................................6
1.1.7 X42 - Absorber Monitoring ...........................................................................7
1.1.8 X43 - Absorber Monitoring ...........................................................................7
1.1.9 X44 - Overcurrent Monitoring for External Fan ............................................8
1.2 Interfaces on Transmitter Top .......................................................................8
1.2.1 X1 - Antenna Output: (1 5/8" EIA Connector) ...............................................8
1.2.2 X100A - Ethernet A Remote (Standard): 8-Contact Female ........................8
1.2.3 X100B - Ethernet B Remote (N+1 Option): 8-Contact Female .....................9
1.2.4 X232 - RS-232-C: 9-Contact D-Sub Female ................................................9
1.2.5 X11L Modulation Input Left/MPX: XLR Female ..........................................10
1.2.6 X11R Modulation Input Right: XLR Female ...............................................10
1.2.7 X21 Digital Audio (AES/EBU) : XLR Female ..............................................11
1.2.8 X12 AUX1 - RDS Input: BNC Female ........................................................11
1.2.9 X13 Pilot Output: BNC Female ...................................................................11
1.2.10 X14 AUX3 - SCA3 Input: BNC Female ......................................................12
1.2.11 X15 AUX2 - SCA2 Input: BNC Female ......................................................12
1.3 Parallel Remote-Control Interface (Optional) .............................................12
1.3.1 Command Inputs ........................................................................................13
1.3.1.1 R&S NetCCU800 .............................................................................................. 13
1.3.1.2 Main Transmitter .............................................................................................. 13
1.3.2 Status Outputs ............................................................................................15
1.3.2.1 R&S NetCCU800 .............................................................................................. 16
1.3.2.2 Transmitter A .................................................................................................... 16
1.3.2.3 Main Transmitter .............................................................................................. 16
1.3.2.4 Output-Stage Standby ...................................................................................... 22
1.4 CAN-Bus Rack Bus on Transmitter Top .....................................................22
1.4.1 X101B - CAN-Bus Rack Bus B: (9-Contact D-Sub Female) ......................22
1.4.2 X101C - CAN-Bus Rack Bus C - Ext. Pump: (9-Contact D-Sub Female) ..23

3562.0908.72 - 9.3 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

1.5 Interfaces on Rear Panel of Transmitter ....................................................24


1.5.1 X102A - Antenna Forward Power: (N Female, 50 Ohm, P14C) .................24
1.5.2 X102B - Antenna Reflected Power: (N Female, 50 Ohm, P14C) ...............24

2 Connectors on Front Panel of Instruments ................................. 25


2.1 R&S NetCCU800 ...........................................................................................25
2.1.1 X6, RJ45 Local (8-Contact Female) ...........................................................25
2.2 R&S SU800 Exciter .......................................................................................25
2.2.1 X3, SMA Female - MPX Test Point ............................................................25
2.2.2 X4, SMA Female - MPX Test Point ............................................................26
2.2.3 X1 - Ethernet, LAN Female ........................................................................26
2.3 R&S VU825 Amplifier (2.5 kW) .....................................................................26
2.3.1 X3 RF MONITOR - RF Test Output (SMA Female) ...................................26
2.3.2 X5 - Service Interface (25-Contact D-Sub Female) ....................................27

3562.0908.72 - 9.4 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

1 Interface Description

1.1 Front-Panel Interfaces

1.1.1 Q1 - AC Supply Input / Protective Earth

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

Phase L1 Input 400 V 15% Q1.T1 Three-phase current input L1

Phase L2 Input 400 V 15% Q1.T2 Three-phase current input L2

Phase L3 Input 400 V 15% Q1.T3 Three-phase current input L1

Neutral N Input 0V Q1.N Three-phase current input N

Safety ground Input 0V X.PE PE terminal


PE

Safety ground Input 0V PE pin M8


PE

1.1.2 X57 - R&S ZR800Z1 Connector Kit Option

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

PhasePhase L1 Input 230 V 15% X57.L1 Separate circuit

Neutral N Input 0V X57.N

Safety ground Input 0V X57.PE


PE

1.1.3 X33 - External Fan (Optional)

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

Phase L1 Input 400 V 15% K8.1 Three phase output L1, 4.5 A

Phase L2 Input 400 V 15% K8.3 Three phase output L2, 4.5 A

Phase L3 Input 400 V 15% K8.5 Three phase output L3, 4.5 A

3562.0908.72 - 9.5 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

Neutral N Input 0V Three phase input N

Safety ground Input 0V K8.PE8 PE terminal


PE

1.1.4 External Fan for Dummy Antenna (Optional) - Wago Plug-In


Terminal

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

Phase L1 Input 230 V 15% X33.4 Automatic line fuse F8 [3A]

Neutral N Input 0V X33.5 Connected via K3

Safety ground Input 0V X33.6


PE

Note If no option for connecting a three phase external fan has been wired, this constitutes a sin-
gle phase output.

1.1.5 X34 - External Absorber Cooling System (Optional) - Wago


Plug-In Terminal

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

Phase L1 Input 230 V 15% X34.1 Automatic line fuse F8 [3A]

Neutral N Input 0V X34.2

PROTECTION Input 0V X34.3


EARTH PE

1.1.6 X41 - RF Carrier Loop

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

MAIN TX LOOP Input -12 V 2 V X41.1 -12 V floating

LOOP COM (+) Output +12 V 2 V X41.2 +12 V floating


(contact 1 to 2 must be
closed before the transmitter
can be switched on)

3562.0908.72 - 9.6 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

RESERVE TX Input -12 V 2 V X41.3 -12 V floating


LOOP

LOOP COM (+) Output +12 V 2 V X41.4 +12 V floating


(contact 3 to 4 must be
closed before the transmitter
can be switched on)

1.1.7 X42 - Absorber Monitoring

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

FAULT SYSTEM Input TTL X42.1 Jumper referenced to 0 V


ABSORBER

REF RACK Output 0V X42.2 Reference 0 V


SIGNALS (contact 1 to 2 must be
closed in order before the
transmitter can be switched
on)

FAULT RACK Input TTL X42.3 Jumper referenced to 0 V


ABSORBER

REF RACK Output 0V X42.4 Reference 0 V


SIGNALS (contact 3 to 4 must be
closed before the transmitter
can be switched on)

1.1.8 X43 - Absorber Monitoring

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

FAULT Input TTL X43.1 Jumper referenced to 0 V


COOLING 2

REF RACK Output 0V X43.2 Reference 0 V


COOLING

FAULT Input TTL X43.3 Jumper referenced to 0 V


COOLING 1

REF RACK Output 0V X43.4 Reference 0 V


SIGNALS

WARNING Input TTL X43.5 Jumper referenced to 0 V


COOLING

3562.0908.72 - 9.7 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

REF RACK Output 0V X43.6 Reference 0 V


SIGNALS

1.1.9 X44 - Overcurrent Monitoring for External Fan

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

FAULT EXT: Input TTL X44.1 Jumper referenced to 0 V


COOLING

REF RACK Output 0V X44.4 Reference 0 V


SIGNALS Opening of contact causes
overcurrent message.

1.2 Interfaces on Transmitter Top

1.2.1 X1 - Antenna Output: (1 5/8" EIA Connector)

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

RF output Output Nominal power X1 Nominal power according to


at 50 power class 2.5 to 12.5 kW
VSWR max. 1.6 87.5 to 108 MHz

Outer conductor Input 0V X1 Ground


GND

1.2.2 X100A - Ethernet A Remote (Standard): 8-Contact Female

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

Tx+ Output Ethernet X100A.1 Transmit line

Tx- Output Ethernet X100A.2 Transmit line

Rx+ Input Ethernet X100A.3 Receive line

Bidirec- 75 termina- X100A.4


tional tion

3562.0908.72 - 9.8 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

Bidirec- 75 termina- X100A.5


tional tion

Rx- Ethernet X100A.6 Receive line

Bidirec- 75 termina- X100A.7


tional tion

Bidirec- 75 termina- X100A.8


tional tion

1.2.3 X100B - Ethernet B Remote (N+1 Option): 8-Contact Female

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

Tx+ Output Ethernet X100B.1 Transmit line

Tx- Output Ethernet X100B.2 Transmit line

Rx+ Input Ethernet X100B.3 Receive line

Bidirec- 75 termina- X100B.4


tional tion

Bidirec- 75 termina- X100B.5


tional tion

RX- Ethernet X100B.6 Receive line

Bidirec- 75 termina- X100B.7


tional tion

Bidirec- 75 termina- X100B.8


tional tion

1.2.4 X232 - RS-232-C: 9-Contact D-Sub Female

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

n.c. Output X232.1

RS232_Tx Output RS-232 X232.2 Transmit line

RS232_Rx Input RS-232 X232.3 Receive line

n.c. X232.4

3562.0908.72 - 9.9 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

GND Bidirec- X232.5


tional

n.c. X232.6

n.c. X232.7

n.c. X232.8

1.2.5 X11L Modulation Input Left/MPX: XLR Female

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

Left MPX Input 0V X11L.1 GND

AUDIO IN + Input Audio level: X11L.2 + Audio L or MPX


-6 to +12 dBu
MPX level:
-1 to +16 dBu
Zin = 600 or >
2 k

AUDIO IN - Input Audio level: X11L.3 - Audio L or MPX


-6 to +12 dBu
MPX level:
-1 to +16 dBu
Zin = 600 or >
2 k

1.2.6 X11R Modulation Input Right: XLR Female

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

Right Input 0V X11R.1 GND

AUDIO IN + Input Audio level: X11R.2 + Audio L or MPX


-6 to +12 dBu
MPX level:
-1 to +16 dBu
Zin = 600 or >
2 k

AUDIO IN - Input Audio level: X11R.3 - Audio L or MPX


-6 to +12 dBu
MPX level:
-1 to +16 dBu
Zin = 600 or >
2 k

3562.0908.72 - 9.10 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

1.2.7 X21 Digital Audio (AES/EBU) : XLR Female

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

AES/EBU Input 0V X21.1 GND

AUDIO IN + Input AES/EBU level: X21.2 + AES/EBU or MPX


200 mV pp to 10 V
pp
Zi = 110 bal-
anced
...............................
MPX level:
-1 to +16 dBu
Zin 600 / >2 k
balanced or unbal-
anced

AUDIO IN - Input AES/EBU level: X21.3 - AES/EBU or MPX


200 mV pp to 10 V
pp
Zi = 110 bal-
anced
...............................
MPX level:
-1 to +16 dBu
Zin 600 / >2 k
balanced or unbal-
anced

1.2.8 X12 AUX1 - RDS Input: BNC Female

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

RDS Input -18 to -7 dBu X12.1 RDS signal or


for nominal devia- SCA signal 1
tion
typ. 4 kHz

GND Input 0V X12.2 Ground

1.2.9 X13 Pilot Output: BNC Female

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

Pilot Output 19 kHz X13.1 Squarewave signal 1:1


1 V squarewave
T1:1

3562.0908.72 - 9.11 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

GND Output 0V X13.2 Ground

1.2.10 X14 AUX3 - SCA3 Input: BNC Female

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

SCA2 Input -14 to +2 dBu X14.1 SCA signal 2


for nominal devia-
tion
typ. 4 kHz

GND Output 0V X14.2 Ground

1.2.11 X15 AUX2 - SCA2 Input: BNC Female

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

SCA3 Input -14 to +2 dBu X15.1 SCA signal 3


for nominal devia-
tion
typ. 4 kHz

GND Output 0V X15.2-4 Ground

1.3 Parallel Remote-Control Interface (Optional)

The following section describes the signals (commands and messages) that are communi-
cated via the parallel remote control interface. The signals to function groups are summa-
rized in a series of tables.

The letter "X" in the following columns identifies which signal is valid for each given trans-
mitter system:

STX (single TX = single transmitter)


DD (dual drive = exciter standby)
APA (active PA = active output stage standby).

3562.0908.72 - 9.12 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

1.3.1 Command Inputs


The command inputs have two 25 pin female D-Sub connectors available (X101A and
X101B).

The command inputs specified in the tables must be connected to the common command
line 0VFLT. For this the following contacts

X101.24A
X101.25A
X101.24B and
X101.25B

are available.

1.3.1.1 R&S NetCCU800

Contact assign-
Signal STX DD APA
ment

RESET X101A.3 X X X

1.3.1.2 Main Transmitter

Contact assign-
Signal STX DD APA
ment

Operating mode On X101A.1 X X X

Off X101A.2 X X X

1) Automatic exciter function

Contact assign-
Signal STX DD APA
ment

Operating mode OFF X101A.11 X X

On X101A.12 X X

Preselection Exciter A X101A.13 X X

Exciter B X101A.14 X X

External switchover X101B.3 X X

3562.0908.72 - 9.13 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

2) Exciter A

Contact assign-
Signal STX DD APA
ment

Pilot OFF X101A.7 X X X

ON X101A.8 X X X

Preemphasis OFF X101A.9 X X X

ON X101A.10 X X X

2a) Automatic input function

Contact assign-
Signal STX DD APA
ment

Preselection Channel 1 X101A.4 X X X

Channel 2 X101A.5 X X X

AUTO X101A.6 X X X

3) Exciter B

Contact assign-
Signal STX DD APA
ment

Pilot OFF X101B.7 X X

ON X101B.8 X X

Preemphasis OFF X101B.9 X X

ON X101B.10 X X

3a) Automatic input function

Contact assign-
Signal STX DD APA
ment

Preselection Channel 1 X101B.4 X X

Channel 2 X101B.5 X X

AUTO X101B.6 X X

3562.0908.72 - 9.14 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

4) Automatic output-stage function

Contact assign-
Signal STX DD APA
ment

Operating OFF X101B.11 X


mode
ON X101B.12 X

Preselection Output stage A on X101B.13 X


antenna

Output stage B on X101B.14 X


antenna

Output stage A+B X101B.15 X


on antenna

Output stage A+B X101B.16 X


on dummy antenna

5) Output-stage standby

Contact assign-
Signal STX DD APA
ment

Operating OFF X101A.15 X X


mode
ON X101A.16 X X

1.3.2 Status Outputs


For the command inputs, the following eight 25 pin D-Sub male connectors

X201A
X201B
X203A
X203B
X205A
X205B
X207A and
X207B

are available.

Resistance of the contacts:

3562.0908.72 - 9.15 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

Closed: R 0.2
Open: R 10 M

Contact types:

NO (normally open): Contact is open in idle state


NC (normally closed): Contact is closed in idle state
BISTABLE: Contact state is controlled by voltage.

1.3.2.1 R&S NetCCU800

Signal Contact STX DD APA

Assign-
Type
ment

Local mode X201A.12 BISTABL X X X


X201A.25 E

1.3.2.2 Transmitter A

Signal Contact STX DD APA

Assign-
Type
ment

Sum warning X201A.9 NO X X X


X201A.22

Sum fault X201A.11 NC X X X


X201A.10

1.3.2.3 Main Transmitter

Signal Contact STX DD APA

Assign-
Type
ment

Operating mode OFF X201A.1 NO X X X


X201A.14

ON X201A.2 NO X X X
X201A.15

3562.0908.72 - 9.16 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

Signal Contact STX DD APA

Assign-
Type
ment

RF present X201A.3 NO X X X
X201A.16

1) Automatic exciter function

Signal Contact STX DD APA

Assign-
Type
ment

Operating mode OFF X203B.5 NO X X


X203B.18

ON X203B.6 NO X X
X203B.19

Preselection Exciter A X203B.1 NO X X


X203B.14

Exciter B X203B.2 NO X X
X203B.15

Operation with Exciter A X203B.3 NO X X


X203B.16

Exciter B X203B.4 NO X X
X203B.17

Ready X203B.8 NO X X
X203B.20

Switchover X203B.9 NO X X
effected X203B.22

Sum fault X203B.11 NC X X


X203B.10

3562.0908.72 - 9.17 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

2) Exciter A

Signal Contact STX DD APA

Assign-
Type
ment

Pilot OFF X203A.1 NO X X X


X203A.14

ON X203A.2 NO X X X
X203A.15

Preemphasis OFF X203A.3 NO X X X


X203A.16

ON X203A.4 NO X X X
X203A.17

Sum warning X201B.9 NO X X X


X201B.22

Sum fault X201B.11 NC X X X


X201B.10

2a) Automatic input function

Signal Contact STX DD APA

Assign-
Type
ment

Operation with Channel 1 X201B.1 NO X X X


X201B.14

Channel 2 X201B.2 NO X X X
X201B.15

Input 1 not OK X201B.3 NO X X X


X201B.16

Input 2 not OK X201B.4 NO X X X


X201B.17

3562.0908.72 - 9.18 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

3) Exciter B

Signal Contact STX DD APA

Assign-
Type
ment

Pilot OFF X205B.1 NO X X


X205B.14

ON X205B.2 NO X X
X205B.15

Preemphasis OFF X205B.3 NO X X


X205B.16

ON X205B.4 NO X X
X205B.17

Sum warning X205A.9 NO X X


X205A.22

Sum fault X205A.11 NC X X


X205A.10

3a) Automatic input function

Signal Contact STX DD APA

Assign-
Type
ment

Operation with Channel 1 X205A.1 NO X X


X205A.14

Channel 2 X205A.2 NO X X
X205A.15

Input 1 not OK X205A.3 NO X X


X205A.16

Input 2 not OK X205A.4 NO X X


X205A.17

3562.0908.72 - 9.19 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

4) Main exciter

Signal Contact STX DD APA

Assign-
Type
ment

RF present X203A.8 NO X X
X203A.20

5) Standby exciter

Signal Contact STX DD APA

Assign-
Type
ment

Operating mode OFF X203A.9 NO X X


X203A.22

ON X203A.11 NO X X
X203A.23

6) Automatic output stage function

Signal Contact STX DD APA

Assign-
Type
ment

Operating OFF X207A.5 NO X


mode X207A.18

ON X207A.6 NO X
X207A.19

Preselection Output stage A on X207A.1 NO X


antenna X207A.14

Output stage B on X207A.2 NO X


antenna X207A.15

Output stage A+B X207A.3 NO X


on antenna X207A.16

Output stage A+B X207A.4 NO X


on dummy antenna X207A.17

Ready X207A.8 NO X
X207A.20

3562.0908.72 - 9.20 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

Signal Contact STX DD APA

Assign-
Type
ment

Switchover X207A.9 NO X
effected X207A.22

Sum fault X207A.11 NC X


X207A.10

7) Output stage A

Signal Contact STX DD APA

Assign-
Type
ment

RF present X201A.4 NO X X X
X201A.17

RF 1 present X201A.5 NO X X X
X201A.18

Reflection X205A.25 NO X X X
X205A.24

Sum warning X201A.6 NO X X X


X201A.19

Sum fault X201A.8 NC X X X


X201A.7

8) Output stage B

Signal Contact STX DD APA

Assign-
Type
ment

RF present X207B.6 NO X
X207B.19

RF 1 present X207B.8 NO X
X207B.20

Reflection X207A.25 NO X
X207A.24

Sum warning X207B.9 NO X


X207B.22

3562.0908.72 - 9.21 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

Signal Contact STX DD APA

Assign-
Type
ment

Sum fault X207B.11 NC X


X207B.10

1.3.2.4 Output-Stage Standby

Signal Contact STX DD APA

Assign-
Type
ment

Operating OFF X207B.1 NO X


mode X207B.14

ON X207B.2 NO X
X207B.15

1.4 CAN-Bus Rack Bus on Transmitter Top

1.4.1 X101B - CAN-Bus Rack Bus B: (9-Contact D-Sub Female)

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

12V_RED Bidirec- 12 V - 1 V X101B.1 Redundant 12 V supply


tional

RC_A_CAN_L Bidirec- CAN-Level X101B.2 CAN bus signal


tional

CAN_GND Bidirec- 0V X101B.3 CAN GND


tional

12V_RED Bidirec- 12 V - 1 V X101B.4 Redundant 12 V supply


tional

CAN_SHLD Bidirec- GND X101B.5 Shield


tional

GND Bidirec- GND X101B.6 GND


tional

RC_A_CAN_H Bidirec- CAN+Level X101B.7 CAN bus signal


tional

3562.0908.72 - 9.22 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

12V_ASI Bidirec- 12 V - 1.5 V X101B.8


tional

CAN_V+ Bidirec- 12 V - 1 V X101B.9


tional

1.4.2 X101C - CAN-Bus Rack Bus C - Ext. Pump: (9-Contact D-Sub


Female)

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

RS232_RxD0 Input RS232 X101C.1 Internal serial interface, rack


controller

C_CAN_L Bidirec- CAN-Level X101C.2 CAN bus signal


tional

CAN_GND Bidirec- 0V X101C.3 CAN GND


tional

BOOT Input TTL X101C.4 Bootstrap mode key for rack


controller

CAN_SHLD Bidirec- GND X101C.5 Shield


tional

GND Bidirec- GND X101C.6 GND


tional

C_CAN_H Bidirec- CAN+Level X101C.7 CAN bus signal


tional

RS232_TxD0 Output RS232 X101C.8 Internal serial interface, rack


controller

CAN_V+ Bidirec- 12 V - 1.5 V X101C.9 Supply of external bus driver


tional Imax = 0.1 A component from pump con-
trol

Note X101C is not present in air cooled transmitters.

3562.0908.72 - 9.23 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

1.5 Interfaces on Rear Panel of Transmitter

1.5.1 X102A - Antenna Forward Power: (N Female, 50 Ohm, P14C)

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

RF Output 10 dBm at 50 X102A 6 dB/octave increase


Test output for 97.5 MHz Reflected output to be termi-
Forward power and nominal nated with 50
power
Directional
attenuation >
40 dB

Outer conductor Input 0V X102A Ground


GND

1.5.2 X102B - Antenna Reflected Power: (N Female, 50 Ohm,


P14C)

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

RF Output 10 dBm at 50 X103A 6 dB/octave increase


Test output for 97.5 MHz Reflected output to be termi-
Reflected power and nominal nated with 50
power
Directional
attenuation >
40 dB

Outer conductor Input 0V X103A Ground


GND

3562.0908.72 - 9.24 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

2 Connectors on Front Panel of Instruments

2.1 R&S NetCCU800

2.1.1 X6, RJ45 Local (8-Contact Female)


Note For PC connection with crossed connecting cable.

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

Tx+ Output Ethernet X6.1 Transmit line

Tx- Output Ethernet X6.2 Transmit line

Rx+ Input Ethernet X6.3 Receive line

Bidirec- 75 termina- X6.4


tional tion

Bidirec- 75 termina- X6.5


tional tion

Rx- Ethernet X6.6 Receive line

Bidirec- 75 termina- X6.7


tional tion

Bidirec- 75 termina- X6.8


tional tion

2.2 R&S SU800 Exciter

2.2.1 X3, SMA Female - MPX Test Point

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

TEST_MON Output +6 dBu at = X3 The MPX signal for test pur-


600 poses is provided by default;
other test signals can also be
output

Outer conductor Input 0V X3 Ground


GND

3562.0908.72 - 9.25 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

2.2.2 X4, SMA Female - MPX Test Point

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

RF_OUT_MON Output +7 dBm to 13 X4 RF output signal for test pur-


dBm poses
87.50 MHz to
108.00 MHz

Outer conductor Input 0V X3 Ground


GND

2.2.3 X1 - Ethernet, LAN Female

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

Tx+ Output Ethernet X1.1 Transmit line

Tx- Output Ethernet X1.2 Transmit line

Rx+ Input Ethernet X1.3 Receive line

Bidirec- 75 termina- X1.4


tional tion

Bidirec- 75 termina- X1.5


tional tion

Rx- Ethernet X1.6 Receive line

Bidirec- 75 termina- X1.7


tional tion

Bidirec- 75 termina- X1.8


tional tion

2.3 R&S VU825 Amplifier (2.5 kW)

2.3.1 X3 RF MONITOR - RF Test Output (SMA Female)

Direc-
Signal name Value range Contact Remarks
tion

RF_MONITOR Output +13 4 dBm X3 RF monitor


at Pnom

3562.0908.72 - 9.26 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

Direc-
Signal name Value range Contact Remarks
tion

Outer conductor Input 0V X3 Ground


GND

2.3.2 X5 - Service Interface (25-Contact D-Sub Female)

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

GND Output 0V X5.1 Ground

(PGRM_E) Bidirec- X5.14 Programming


tional

n.c. X5.2 n.c.

n.c. X.15 n.c.

n.c. X5.3 n.c.

n.c. X.5.16 n.c.

+12 V Output 12 V, max. 0.1 A X5.4 +12 V supply for test fixture

n.c. Bidirec- X5.17 n.c.


tional

n.c. Bidirec- X5.5 n.c.


tional

I_DC Output 0 V to 5 V; 4 V = Imax X5.18 Power supply current

I_7 Output 0 V to 15 V; 0.6 V/A; X5.6 Test voltage from transistor


Ri = 1 k V105

V_DC Output 0 V to 3.4 V X5.19 Power supply voltage


(10:1 voltage divider)

I_6 Output 0 V to 15 V; 0.6 V/A; X5.7 Test voltage from transistor


Ri = 1 k V106

V_REG Output 0 V to 1.2 V X5.20 Measured value for control


(Nx6000: (10:1 voltage divider) voltage
V_PHASE)

I_5 Output 0 V to 15 V; 0.6 V/A; X5.8 Test voltage from transistor


Ri = 1 k V105

REFL_OUT Output 0 V to 5 V X5.21 Output reflection


4.0 V = smax

I_4 Output 0 V to 15 V; 0.6 V/A; X5.9 Test voltage from transistor


Ri = 1 k V104

3562.0908.72 - 9.27 - EN-5


Chapter 9 Appendix

Signal name Direction Value range Contact Remarks

PWR_OUT Output 0 V to 5 V X5.22 Measured value for output


4.0 V = Pnom power

I_3 Output 0 V to 15 V; 0.6 V/A; X5.10 Test voltage from transistor


Ri = 1 k V103

PWR_B Output 0 V to 5 V X5.23 Measured value for forward


4.0 V = Pnom power; branch B

I_2 Output 0 V to 15 V; 0.6 V/A; X5.11 Test voltage from transistor


Ri = 1 k V102

PWR_A Output 0 V to 5 V X5.24 Measured value for forward


4.0 V = Pnom power; branch A

I_1 Output 0 V to 15 V; 0.6 V/A; X5.12 Test voltage from transistor


Ri = 1 k V101

I_8 Output 0 V to 15 V; 0.6 V/A; X5.25 Test voltage from transistor


Ri = 1 k V108

I_DRV Output 0 V to 15 V, 2 V/A, X5.13 Driver stream


Ri = 1 k

3562.0908.72 - 9.28 - EN-5


Broadcasting Division

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Printed in Germany

- A.1 - EN-5

You might also like